Home

HP 8753C User's Manual

1. 4 2 1 2 2 Additional HP IB Information wie a BAe oe ee at We Ue a ae 4 2 1 2 3 HP 8752C Network Analyzer Array Data Formats o 2 26 2 4 Limit Line and Data Point Special Functions Commands 4 2 78 2 5 Limit Segment Table for Figure 2 4 2 81 2 6 Example Output OUTPSEGAM min max of all segments 2 82 2 7 Pass Fail No_Limit Status Constants 0 2 83 2 8 Min Max Test Constants a sm EA O ee A A AR 2 83 2 9 Example Output OUTPSEGAF pass fail for all segments 2 85 2 10 Example Output OUTPSEGM min max per segment 2 87 2 11 Example Output OUTPSEGAM min max for all segments 2 88 2 12 Example Output OUTPDATP data per point cc clic 2 90 2 13 Example Output OUTPDATPR data per range of points 2 91 Contents 5 Index ec saree a a EE PT TT TT E E ETE ESE Special characters 1 31 A A B 1 55 AB 1 55 abort message IFC 1 12 abort sequence 2 7 additional information 2 1 BASIC 6 2 2 1 ADDRCONTI D 1 55 ADDRDISC D 1 55 address controller 1 55 disk drive 1 55 peripheral 1 55 plotter 1 55 power meter 1 55 printer 1 55 address capability 1 8 addresses for HP IB 1 12 ADDRPERI D 1 55 ADDRPLOTID 1 55 ADDRPOWM D 1 55 ADDRPRINID 1 55 adjust brightness 1 56 adjust color 1 58 adjust tint 1 78 AHI full acceptor h
2. 9 399 Q 157 8 Deg 157 8 Deg 0 2518 The commands in the following example are sent while using the format command LOGM Example Sending SELPT5 and OUTPDATP may return the following 3 513410E 00 0 00915E 15 Note that the second number is insignificant 2 90 HP BASIC Programming Examples Output Data Per Range of Points The HP IB command OUTPDATR returns the value of the selected points using FORM4 ASCH This ASCH format requires many data bytes per point for transfer For a large number of points it may be faster to make trace data dumps OUTPDATA using a binary format The range of points is selected using the SELMINPT N and SELMAXPT N commands select minimum point select maximum point of desired point range These commands return the last max point if the selected points are out of range Only the SELMAXPT will be returned if the selected minimum point is greater than the selected maximum point The commands in the following example are sent while using the format command LOGM Example Sending SELMINPT5 SELMAXPT7 and OUTPDATR may return the following 3 880465E 01 0 000039E O1 1 901648E 01 1 363988E 11 5 57587E 01 1 258655E 30 Note that the second number is insignificant For an explanation of these results see Table 2 13 Note A new Line Feed character LF is inserted after the segment number and after each data pair Table 2 13 Example Output OUTPDATPR data per ra
3. Increment by 1 Decrement by 1 If counter equals O then do sequence If counter not eq IFLONEZESEQ lt I gt 2 O then do sequence Stimulus CENTID Stimulus range SPAN D STAR D STOP D Stimulus range Stimulus range Stimulus range t For frequency sweeps 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 300 kHz to 3 GHz for Option 003 and 30 kHz to 6 GHz for Option 006 For power sweeps 15 to 20 dBm in range 0 25 dB maximum in other ranges For CW time 0 to 24 hours For frequency sweep transform on 1 frequency step For CW time sweep transform on 1 time step HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 45 Table 1 8 Key Select Codes continued Function Action Mmemonic S o Ramge Service Edit power loss table Edit power loss segment Edit cal sensor table Edit cal sensor segment Analog bus On off Edit list Use sensor A or B Add segment Edit segment N Done with segment Delete segment Done Clear list Frequency Value Edit sensor menu A Edit sensor menu B Add segment Edit segment N Done with segment Delete segment Done Clear list Frequency Cal factor SYSTEM ANAB lt ON OFF gt PWRLOSS lt ON OFF gt POWLLIST USES lt ENSA ENSB gt SADD SEDI D SDON SDEL EDITDONE CLEL POWLFREQ D POWLLOSS D CALFSENA CALFSENB SADD SEDIID SDON SDEL EDITDONE CLEL CALFFREQ D CALFCALFID pi ul pd Guido S pe Gado ph Se
4. The default address for the analyzer is device 16 and the display address is device 17 Note There is also an address for the system controller This address refers to the controller when the network analyzer is being used in pass control mode This is the address that control is passed back to when the analyzer controlled operation is complete Response to HP IB Meta Messages IEEE 488 Universal Commands Abort The analyzer responds to the abort message IFC by halting all listener talker and controller functions Device Clear The analyzer responds to the device clear commands DCL SDC by clearing the input and output queues and clearing any HP IB errors The status registers and the error queue are unaffected Local The analyzer will go into local mode if the local command GTL is received the remote line is unasserted or the front panel local key is pressed Changing the analyzer s HP IB status from remote to local does not affect any of the front panel functions or values 1 12 HP IB Programming and Command Reference Local Lockout If the analyzer receives the local lockout command LLO while it is in remote mode it will disable the entire front panel except for the line power switch A local lockout condition can only be cleared by releasing the remote line although the local command GTL will place the instrument temporarily in local mode Parallel Poll The analyzer does not respond to parailel poll co
5. a a a a ee eee eee 2 83 2 8 Min Max Test Constants o he ee wee E oe es Oe es ta a US 2 83 2 9 Example Output OUTPSEGAF pass fail for all segments 2 2 2 85 2 10 Example Output OUTPSEGM min max per segment 2 2 87 2 11 Example Output OUTPSEGAM min max for all segments cc cc 2 88 2 12 Example Output OUTPDATP data per point 2 90 2 13 Example Output OUTPDATPR data per range of points 2 2 91 Contents 3 HP BASIC Programming Examples Introduction This is an introduction to the remote operation of the HP 8752C network analyzer using an HP 9000 Series 300 computer It is a tutorial introduction using BASIC programming examples The examples used in this chapter are on the HP 8752C HP BASIC Programming Examples disk The user should be familiar with the operation of the analyzer before attempting to remotely control the analyzer via the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB See the The HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide for analyzer operating information The Hewlett Packard computers specifically addressed in these examples are the HP 9000 Series 300 computers operating with BASIC 6 2 This document is not intended to teach BASIC programming or to discuss HP IB theory except at an introductory level For more information concerning BASIC see the Table 2 1 for a list of manuals supporting the
6. 2 78 HP BASIC Programming Examples Table 2 4 cont Limit Line and Data Point Special Functions Commands LIMIT TEST STATUS BY CHANNEL Limit test chl Outputs status of limit test for channel 1 Limit test ch2 Outputs status of limit test for channel 2 LIMIT TEST STATUS BY SEGMENT Selects the segment number for the OUTPSEGF and OUTPSEGM commands to report on D can range from 1 to 18 1 Limit test status OUTPSEGAF Outputs the segment number and it s limit test status for all active segments Limit test status OUTPSEGF Outputs the limit test status for a specified segment See SELSEG D LIMIT TEST STATUS BY POINT This command is similar to OUTPLIMF except that it reports the number of failures first followed by the stimulus and trace values for each failed point in the test note use command LIMITEST lt ON gt to function properly T For the definition of a limit segment see Example Display of Limit Lines Values returned for limit test status are 1 PASS 0 FAIL 1 NO_LIMIT HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 79 Example Display of Limit Lines The features that output data by limit segment are implemented based on the current definition of a limit segment The actual limit lines formed by the limit table almost never have a 1 for 1 relationship with the segment numbers in the limit edit table Out of 18 segments in the limit table you can create 18 limit lines if a all limit segments are co
7. This program shows how to manipulate calibration data from the analyzer It demonstrates how to read calibration data from the analyzer and how to replace it The type of calibration active is determined and the program reads in the correct number of arrays The number of points in the trace and in the cal array is determined and used to dimension storage arrays i EXAMPSB i ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 Assign an 1 0 path for the analyzer ASSIGN CNwa_bin TO 716 FORMAT OFF Assign binary path CLEAR SCREEN Initialize the analyzer ABORT 7 Generate an IFC Interface Clear CLEAR Nwa SDC Selected Device Clear l Data for determining CAL type and number of arrays DATA CALIRESP 1 CALIRA1 2 CALIS111 3 DATA NOOP O INTEGER Hdr Lgth I J Integers for reading headers READ Calt Numb Read CAL type from data statement IF Numb 0 THEN GOTO 680 OUTPUT ONwa Calt ENTER ONvwa Active IF NOT Active THEN GOTO 240 PRINT Calt Numb If no CAL type is present Exit Query if CAL type is active Read 1 if active Load another CAL type and re try sam ee ii oaa Active CAL and number of arrays OUTPUT Nwa FORMS OUTPUT Nwa POIN Form 3 IEEE 64 bit floating point Request trace length emo su cum um ENTER Nwa Poin Read number of points ALLOCATE Cal 1 Numb 1 Poin 1 2 Arrays for CAL arrays 1 Number of arrays number of points real and imag value per point i FOR I i TO Num
8. IF BIT Estat 4 THEN IF Pass gt 0 THEN BEEP 1200 05 Bit 4 is failed limit on channel 1 passed before Now not passing beep cu saw oom E Pass 0 Reset pass to 0 GOTO Tune Adjust and measure again END IF i BEEP 2500 O01 Limit test passed passing beep Pass Pass 1 Increment number of passes DISP LEAVE DEVICE ALONE IF Pass lt Qual THEN GOTO Measure Warn not to adjust as it passed If not enough passes to qualify 2 62 HP BASIC Programming Examples 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 t t Device passed DISP DEVICE PASSED FOR I i TO 10 Number of passes enough to qualify Announce the device passed and E ee BEEP 1000 05 prompt operator to connect new BEEP 2000 01 device to test NEXT I INPUT PRESS RETURN FOR NEXT DEVICE Dum Pass 0 Initialize pass counter GOTO Measure Begin measurement 1 END Running the Program Note This program assumes a response calibration through calibration has been performed prior to running the program Set up a limit test table on channel 1 for a specific device either manually or using the program in Example 5A Run the program and enter the number of passed sweeps desired for qualification After entering the qualification number connect the device When a sweep passes the computer beeps When enough consecutive sweeps qualify the device as passing the computer emits a dual tone beep to a
9. Store formated data OUTPUT Nwa EXTMDATOON Store data file only INPUT Enter data file name 5 chars File_name Get file name File_name UPC File_name File names are uppercase OUTPUT Nwa TITFi File_name 1 Title for save reg 1 OUTPUT Nwa SAVUASCI t Save as ASCII file Store data file on external disk i OUTPUT ONwa STOR1 Store data to disk file GOSUB Pass_control 1 File storage is complete I INPUT Place disk in controller disk drive then press Return A Read data file information 1 ASSIGN File TO File name amp D1 1400 Open an 1 0 path for file Record cnt 1 3 Counter to count records PRINT CHR 12 Formfeed to clear display PRINT Contents of data file Show contents of the data file Readfile 2 74 HP BASIC Programming Examples 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 690 700 710 720 730 740 750 760 770 780 790 800 810 830 840 850 860 870 880 890 900 910 920 930 940 950 960 970 980 990 1000 1010 1020 1030 1040 1050 1060 1070 1080 ON END File GOTO End file ENTER QFile Record PRINT Record cnt Record Record cnt sRecord cnt i GOTO Readfile 1 End_file PRINT End of File Record_cnt 1 INPUT Press Return to continue A PRINT CHR 12 t Read file data into arrays i RESET File FOR i 1 TO 6 ENTER File Record NEXT 1 ENTER QFile Record Record Record
10. 580 Waitforkey Prompt routine to read a keypress on the controller 590 SUB Waitforkey Lab 600 Position and display text on the analyzer display 610 OUTPUT 717 PG PU PA390 3700 PD LB Lab PRESS ENTER WHEN READYA 620 630 DISP Lab 2 Press ENTER when ready Display prompt on console 640 INPUT A t Read ENTER key press 650 660 QUTPUT 717 PG l Clear analyzer display 670 SUBEND Running the Program Note Before running the program set the desired instrument state This program does not modify the instrument state in any way Run the program and connect the standards as prompted After the standard is connected press on the controller keyboard to continue the program The program assumes that the test ports being calibrated are 509 type N PORT 1 being a female test port and PORT 2 being a male test port The HP 85032B 509 type N Calibration Kit is used The prompts appear just above the message line on the analyzer display After the prompt is displayed pressing on the computer console continues the program The program will display a message when the measurement calibration is complete 2 22 HP BASIC Programming Examples Example 3 Measurement Data Transfer Trace information can be read out of the analyzer in several ways Data can be read from the trace selectively using the markers or the entire trace can be read out If only specific information such as a single point on the trace or the result of
11. A character string operand which must be enclosed by quotes lt gt A necessary appendage An either or choice in appendages HP IB Programming and Command Reference IF bandwidth Correction Interpolative correction Cal sequence Port extensions Velocity factor ZO Begin cal sequence Select response amp isol class Select reflection class Restart Factor On off Set aperture Orvoff Set bandwidth Resume Reflection Transmission Off Set value Set Value Response Response and Isol Reflection 1 port None Response Isolation RFL open RFL short RFL load Table 1 8 Key Select Codes Function Action Mnemonic s o Range AVG AVERREST AVERFACTID AVERO lt ON OFF gt SMOOAPERID SMOOO lt ON OFF gt IFBW D CORR lt ON OFF gt CORI lt ON OFF gt RESC PORTRID PORTI D PORTTID PORT2ID PORE lt ON OFF gt VELOFACTID SETZ D CALIRESP CALIRAI CALISI11 CALN RAIRESP RAHSOL CLASSILA CLASSIIB CLASSIC D 0 to 999 2 1 0 3 p 0 05 to 20 1 0 3 ID 10 30 100 300 1000 3000 3700 Hz 10 s 10 s I0 s 10s Oto 10 0 1 to 5000 ps Gu po pk qui fred j ja ji TT The class commands are OPC compatible if there is only one standard in the class If there is just one standard that standard is measured automatically If there is more than one standard in the class the class command only calls another menu 1
12. After all the segments are displayed the program will prompt the operator for a specific segment to be used Type in the number of the segment and the analyzer will then zoom in on that segment The program will continue looping allowing continuous selection of different segments To exit the loop type 0 This will restore all the segments with the command ASEG allowing the analyzer to sweep all of the segments and the program will terminate HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 57 Using Limit Lines to Perform PASS FAIL Tests There are two steps to performing limit testing on the analyzer via HP IB First limit specifications must be defined and loaded into the analyzer Second the limits are activated the device is measured and its performance to the specified limits is signaled by a pass or fail message on the analyzer s display Example 6C illustrates the first step setting up limits Example 6D performs the actual limit testing Example 6C Setting Up Limit Lines Note This program is stored as EXAMP6C on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer The purpose of this example is to show how to create a limit test table and transmit it to the analyzer The command sequence for entering a limit test table imitates the key sequence followed when entering a table from the analyzer s front panel there is a command for every key press Editing a limit is also the same as the key
13. OUTPPRIN OUTPPRNALL OUTPRAF lt I gt OUTPRAW1 OUTPSEGAF OUTPSEGAM OUTPSEGF OUTPSEGM OUTPSEQ lt I gt OUTPSERN OUTPSTAT OUTPTITL PARAOUT D PAUS PCB D Outputs to the HP IB port a raster dump of the display intended for a graphics printer PSOFT lt ON OFF gt controls whether the soft keys are included in the printout Prints all list values or operating and marker parameters in text mode to HP IB Fast data transfer command for OUTPRAW lt I gt Outputs the raw measurement data See Figure 1 4 for the meaning of the data Outputs the segment number and it s limit test status for all active segments Outputs the limit test min max for all segments Outputs the segment number max stimulus max value min stimulus min value for all active segments Outputs the limit test status for a specified segment See SELSEG D Outputs limit test min max for a specified segment See SELSEG D Outputs a sequence listing over HP IB Outputs the serial number of the analyzer Outputs the status byte Outputs the display title Programs all TTL output bits 0 to 15 at once Inserts a pause into a sequence NEWSEQ lt I gt must precede to ensure that a sequence is currently being created or modified Same as ADDRCONT Indicates where control will be passed in pass control mode These commands select the color for the indicated display feature where lt COLOR gt equals one of the following colors whit
14. Sets the external trigger to manual trigger on point OPC compatible HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 65 These commands make the indicated marker active and set its stimulus MARKI1 D MARK2 D MARK3 D MARK4 D MARKS5 D MARKBUCK D MARKCENT MARKCONT MARKCOUP MARKCW MARKDELA MARKDISC MARKFAUV D MARKFSTI D MARKFVAL D MARKMAXI MARKMIDD MARKMINI MARKOFF MARKREF MARKSPAN MARKSTAR MARKSTIM MARKSTOP MARKUNCO MARKZERO MAXF D Marker 1 Marker 2 Marker 3 Marker 4 Marker 5 Places the marker on a specific sweep point bucket D is the bucket number ranging from 0 to number of points less 1 Enters the marker stimulus as the center stimulus Places the markers continuously on the trace not on discrete sample points Couples the markers between the channels as opposed to MARKUNCO Sets the CW frequency to the marker frequency Sets electrical length so group delay is zero at the marker stimulus Places the markers in discrete placement mode Sets the auxiliary value of the fixed marker position Works in coordination with MARKFVAL and MARKFSTI Sets the stimulus position of the fixed marker Sets the value of the fixed marker position See Table 1 3 for the meaning of value and auxiliary value as a function of display format Same as SEAMAX During a limit segment edit makes the marker amplitude the limit segment middle value Same as SEAMIN Turns all ma
15. TIMDTRAN lt ON OFF gt Sequence 1 Sequence 2 Sequence 3 Sequence 4 Sequence 5 Sequence 6 While editing a list frequency segment sets step size Saves display colors Automatically selects the fastest sweep time based on the current analyzer settings for number of points F bandwidth sweep mode averaging condition and frequency span Sets the sweep time Selects the SWR display format Puts the analyzer in talker listener mode Specifies the terminal impedance of an arbitrary impedance standard during a cal kit modification Query test set Always returns a one on the HP 8752C Turns the Option 010 time domain transform ON and OFF OPC compatible 1 78 HP 4B Programming and Command Reference TINTID Adjusts the tint for the selected display feature These commands title the indicated file numbers TITF1 TITF2 TITF3 TITF4 5 TITF5 1 TITLIS TITP File 1 File 2 File 3 File 4 File 5 Enters a new CRT title A maximum of 50 characters alphanumeric and mathematical symbols are allowed Titles a plot when the plotter type is disk Should be followed by a string containing at least one and up to ten alphanumeric characters When a PLOT command is issued then the filename will be appended with the suffix associated with the plot layout FP full page LU left upper quadrant LL left lower quadrant RU right upper quadrant RL right lower quadrant These co
16. i i j 1 SRE i i 7 6 5 ia 3 2 1 E Event Message Check Event i Preset Reques i Status in Output Error Status Forward Reverse i Service Register Queve Queue Register Bi GET io GET 128 54 32 16 8 A 4 2 1 0 Search Limit Limit Bote Service SiNG NUMG Fail Faiied Failed Entry Routise jer Cai St 3 cH 2 CH 1 25 2 Complete Waiting Complete 328 54 32 16 8 4 2 4 EVENT STATUS REGISTER B i Syntox Power User Error Execution Sequence Query Reguest OPC H Oa Raquest FPB E Error Bet Error Centro i 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 EVENT STATUS REGISTER pq6isid Figure 2 2 Status Reporting Structure The analyzer has a status reporting mechanism that provides information about specific internal analyzer functions and events The status byte is an 8 bit register with each bit summarizing the state of one aspect of the instrument For example the error queue summary bit will always be set if there are any errors in the queue The value of the status byte can be read with the HP IB serial poll operation Serial Poll is described in Chapter 1 HP IB Programming and Command Reference under the section titled Response to HP IB Meta Message IEEE 488 Universal Commands This command does not automatically put the instrument in remote mode thus giving the operator access to the analyzer front panel functions The status byte can also be read by sending the command OUTPSTAT
17. 1 61 form feed plotter 1 71 printer 1 72 FREO 1 62 frequency calculation equation 2 26 frequency notation 1 62 frequency related arrays 1 19 full acceptor handshake AH1 1 9 full source handshake SH1 1 9 FULP 1 62 G GATE 1 62 GATECENT D 1 62 gate center time 1 62 gate on off 1 62 gate shape 1 62 maximum 1 62 minimum 1 62 normal 1 62 wide 1 62 GATESPAN D 1 62 gate span time 1 62 GATESTAR D 1 62 gate start time 1 62 GATESTOP D 1 62 gate stop time 1 62 GATSMAXI 1 62 GATSMINI 1 62 GATSNORM 1 62 GATSWIDE 1 62 general structure of syntax 1 4 GOSUB 1 62 gosub sequence 1 62 graticule color 1 70 group execute trigger response DT1 1 9 guidelines for code naming 1 3 H halting all modes and functions 1 12 handshake lines 1 7 helpful features for developing programs 2 13 HOLD 1 62 HP 9000 Series 300 computer 2 1 HP IB address capability 1 8 addresses 1 12 bus structure 1 6 1 7 command formats 1 4 data rate 1 8 device types 1 6 message transfer scheme 1 8 meta messages 1 12 multiple controller capability 1 8 operation 1 6 operational capabilities 1 9 requirements 1 8 status indicators 1 10 HP IB commands 1 1 HP IB interconnect cables 2 1 HP IB only commands 1 49 Index 5 I lt I gt 1 31 identification of analyzer 1 15 of firmware revision 1 15 IDN 1 15 1 49 1 62 IEEE 488 universal commands 1 12 IEEE standard codes formats protoco
18. 1 9 learn string and calibration kit string 1 23 LEFL 1 64 LEFU 1 64 levels of data 1 22 LIF directory size 1 60 LIF format 1 62 LIMD D 1 64 LIMIAMPO D 1 64 LIMILINE 1 64 LIMIMAOF D 1 64 LIMISTIO D 1 64 LIMITEST 1 64 limit line 1 64 limit line amplitude offset 1 64 limit line and data point special functions 2 77 limit lines 2 58 setting up 2 58 limit line stimulus offset 1 64 limit line testing 2 52 list frequency table creating 2 52 list frequency table selecting a single segment 2 55 performing PASS FAIL tests 2 58 using list frequency mode 2 52 limit table edit 1 60 limit test 1 64 limit test beeper 1 55 limit test fail 1 62 limit testing HP IB commands 1 46 limit test pass 1 62 limit test table 2 58 creating 2 58 transmitting 2 58 LIML D 1 64 LIMM D 1 64 LIMS D 1 64 LIMTFL 1 64 LIMTSL 1 64 LIMTSP 1 64 LIMU D 1 64 linear sweep 1 64 line feeds 1 5 lines for control 1 7 lines for handshaking 1 7 line type data 1 64 memory 1 64 LINFREQ 1 64 LINM 1 64 lin mag 1 64 LINTDATA D 1 64 LINTMEMO D 1 64 LISFREQ 1 64 list clear 1 57 listener interface function 1 6 listen mode L 1 10 list frequency mode 2 52 list sweep 1 64 list values 1 64 print 1 72 LISV 1 64 L listen mode 1 10 LOAD lt I gt 1 65 LOADSEQ lt I gt 1 65 local command GTL 1 12 LOCAL HP IB commands 1 38 local lockout 2 5 local lockout command LLO 1 13 local mod
19. Max values Outputs max values for all limit line segments OUTPAMAX values and OUTPAMIN values are both output using OUTPSEGAM Min values OUTPAMIN Outputs min values for all limit line segments OUTPAMIN values and OUTPAMAX values are both output using OUTPSEGAM Min max values OUTPSEGAM Outputs limit test min max for all segs Outputs the segment number max stimulus max value min stimulus and min value for all active segments t Min max value OUTPSEGM Outputs limit test min max for a specified segment See SELSEGID t SELSEG D Selects segment number for the OUTPSEGF and OUTPSEGM commands to report on D can range from 1 to 18 7 DO OUTPUT TRACE DATA BY SELECTED POINTS TRACE DATA BY SELECTED POINTS Last point SELMAXPTID Selects the last point number in the range of points that the OUTPDATR command will report D can range from 0 to the number of points minus 1 First point SELMINPT D Selects the first point number in the range of points that the OUTPDATR command will report D can range from 0 to the number of points minus 1 Specify point SELPT D Selects the single point number that the OUTPDATP command will report D can range from 0 to the number of points minus 1 Data point OUTPDATP Outputs a single trace data value indexed by point see SELPT DD Data range Outputs trace data for range of points see SELMINPTID SELMAXPT D T For the definition of a limit segment see Example Display of Limit Lines
20. P0S Record 1 Startf VAL Record Record Record POS Record 1 Stopf VAL Record Record Record POS Record 1 Num points VAL Record Test for end of file and exit Read ASCII record print record on display Increment record counter Read next record ee aue ao rd e Reached the end of file Records found Formfeed to clear display Rewind file pointer to begining Skip first six records Read frequency data record skip SEG to first space 1 Read start frequency Skip to next space 1 Read stop frequency Skip to next space 1 Read the number of points PRINT Number of points in file Num_points PRINT White space Freq_inc Stopf Startf Num_points 1 Compute frequency increment 820 ALLOCATE Array Num points 2 ENTER File Record ENTER File Record t t Read in the data array PRINT Freq MHz Data 1 Data 2 FOR I 1 TO Num_points ENTER File Record I Array 1 1 VAL Record Data Record POS Record 1 Array 1I 2 VAL Data 7 Freg Startf Freq incx 1 1 Freg Freg 1 E 6 1 PRINT Freq Array 1 1 Array 1 2 NEXT 1 OUTPUT Nwa CONT OUTPUT Nwa OPC WAIT ENTER ONwa Reply LOCAL QNwa STOP Allocate array from Num points Skip SEG_LIST_END record Skip BEGIN record Table header for data array Read in array entries t Read in the record of 2 entries Read first data value Skip to comma and
21. Reading the status byte does not affect its value HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 37 The status byte also summarizes two event status registers that monitor specific conditions within the instrument The status byte also has a bit that is set when the instrument is issuing a service request over HP IB and a bit that is set when the analyzer has data to send out over HP IB See Error Reporting in Chapter 1 of this guide for a discussion of the event status registers Example 4A Using the Error Queue Note This program is stored as EXAMP4A on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer The error queue holds up to 20 instrument errors and warnings in the order that they occurred Each time the analyzer detects an error condition the analyzer displays a message on the CRT and puts the error in the error queue If there are any errors in the queue bit 3 of the status byte will be set The errors can be read from the queue with the OUTPERRO command OUTPERRO causes the analyzer to transmit the error number and message of the oldest error in the queue The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence m An I O path is assigned for the analyzer m The system is initialized m The error message string is allocated m The analyzer is released from remote control m The program begins an endless loop to read the error queue a The status byte is read with a serial poll a The
22. SEQ SCALE STIMULUS MENU SYSTEM Sets the minimum valid frequency of a standard being defined during a cal kit modification MINMAX lt ON OFF gt Enables disables min max recording per segment Min and max values are MINU MODI NEWSEQ lt I gt NEXP NOOP NUMGID recorded per limit segment Limit testing need not be active Displays data minus memory the same as DISPDMM Begins the modify cal kit sequence Begin modifying a sequence Displays the next page of the operating parameters list No operation OPC compatible Activates D number of groups of sweeps A group is whatever is needed to update the current parameter once This function restarts averaging if ON OPC compatible These commands specify the offset value for the indicated parameter for a standard being defined during a cal kit modification OFSDI D Delay offset HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 67 OFSL D OFSZ D OPC OPEP OUTPACTI OUTPAMAX OUTPAMIN OUTPAPER Loss offset Impedance offset Operation complete Reports the completion of the next command received by setting bit O in the event status register or by replying to a query if OPC is issued See Command Query earlier in this chapter Presents a list of key operating parameters NEXP scrolls to the next page of parameters Requesting a plot or print copies the current page The current page can be plotted or printed in raster graphics mode with PLOT
23. SMIMRX 1 76 Smith chart 1 76 Smith markers 1 76 SMOOAPER D 1 76 SMOOO 1 76 smoothing 1 76 smoothing aperture 1 76 SOFR 1 49 1 76 SOFT lt I gt 1 76 SOFT 1 54 SOUP 1 76 source power on off 1 76 SPAN D 1 76 SPECFWDT 1 77 specify class 1 77 specify gate menu 1 77 specify points 1 71 SPECRESI I 1 77 SPECRESP I 1 77 SPECS11A I 1 77 SPECSIIB 1 77 SPECS1I1C 1 77 SPEG 1 77 SPLD 1 77 split display 1 77 SR1 complete service request capabilities 1 9 SRED 1 54 SRQ service request control line 1 7 SSEG D 1 77 S service request asserted by the analyzer 1 10 STANA 1 77 STANB 1 77 STANC 1 77 STAND 1 77 standard defined 1 77 standard definition 1 59 standard labelling 1 64 standard offsets 1 67 standard type 1 77 STANE 1 77 STANF 1 77 STANG 1 77 STAR D 1 77 statistics marker 1 67 status bit definitions 1 24 status byte 1 24 1 26 status indicators 1 10 status reporting 1 24 STB 1 77 STDD 1 77 STDTARBI 1 77 STDTDELA 1 77 STDTLOAD 1 77 STDTOPEN 1 77 STDTSHOR 1 78 step down 1 60 step up 1 80 STIMULUS HP IB commands 1 45 stimulus menu HP IB commands 1 40 stimulus value segment 1 64 STOP D 1 78 storage disk 1 61 internal memory 1 63 store to disk 1 78 STOR lt I gt 1 78 STORSEQ lt I gt 1 78 STPSIZE D 1 78 string for calibration kit 1 23 structure of command syntax 1 4 structure of HP IB bus 1 7 str
24. condition is detected at one of the input ports This is an HP IB only command Selects power range 0 when in manual power range Used with PWRR and PMAN Option 004 only Selects power range 1 when in manual power range Used with PWRR and PMAN Option 004 only Selects power range 2 when in manual power range Used with PWRR and PMAN Option 004 only Selects power range 3 when in manual power range Used with PWRR and PMAN Option 004 only Selects power range 4 when in manual power range Used with PWRR and PMAN Option 004 only Selects power range 5 when in manual power range Used with PWRR and PMAN Option 004 only Selects power range 6 when in manual power range Used with PWRR and PMAN Option 004 only Selects power range 7 when in manual power range Used with PWRR and PMAN Option 004 only Presets the analyzer to the factory preset state OPC compatible Selects color print Copies the display in raster graphics mode to a printer Requires pass control mode Begins printing the sequence selected Prints all list values or operating and marker parameters in ASCII text mode Requires pass control mode Selects standard monochrome print Turns ON and OFF the printer auto feed Sends a form feed to the printer Select the DeskJet 540C printer as the printer type Selects the DeskJet printer as the printer type Selects the Epson ESC P2 printer control language compatible printer as
25. programmed to read the number one 1 response from the analyzer indicating completion of the single sweep At this point a valid trace exists and the trace data could be read into the computer Table 1 2 OPC compatible Commands CHANI EXTTPOIN RST CHAN2 GATEO lt ON OFF gt SAVI CLASS11A ISOD SAVC CLASS11B MANTRIG SAVE lt 1 to 5 gt CLASS11C NOOP SAVEREG lt 01 to 31 gt CLEA lt 1 to 5 gt NUMG SING CLEARALL PRES SLIS CLEAREG lt O1 to 31 RAID STAN lt A to G gt DATI RECA lt 1 to 5 gt TIMDTRAN lt ON OFF gt EXTTOFF RECAREG lt Ol to 31 gt WAIT EXTTON RESPDONE i The class commands are OPC compatible if there is only one standard in the class 1 14 HP IB Programming and Command Reference declara Reading Analyzer Data Output Queue Whenever an output data command is received the analyzer puts the data into the output queue or buffer where it is held until the system controller outputs the next read command The queue however is only one event long the next output data command will overwrite the data already in the queue Therefore it is important to read the output queue immediately after every query or data request from the analyzer Command Query All instrument functions can be queried to find the current ON OFF state or value For instrument state commands append the question mark character 7 to the command to query the state of the functions Suppose the operator has changed the power level from th
26. 1 1 i 3 i r E nw quad wore r ne rh o 1 VR cA O Pho Ww Woe CO 00 DDD DDN He ee OOO OO dd O A 0d O gl A AA pl t 1 4 1 3 k h i 1 1 POR pak jr Soh anh Josh ssh woh eam ak foto Sr fmm rh fam n o fam 4 4 1 L 5 1 I I Spann o a rth d Contents 1 Trace Data Transfers Elia Bk aoe we EE a e a RUDE we 1 19 Stimulus Related Values us ums 4 8 6 Ww A we de SD e 4 1 19 Date Processing Chain a Sk we AS a ea ee eh ae oe 1 21 Hata PUTAS o 5 34 a a AE RE A Bee ta DOES 1 21 Fast Data Transfer Commands e e o Bee Bee AE OR A we awe 1 22 Data Levels cs dodo a Go cee A Se AAA E Mee ees GE 1 22 Learn String and Calibration Kit String 0 1 23 Error R porting bs DE are ah ge AAA AE ee Oe GR Re 1 24 Status Reporting los hk a ee es ey A ee we LENA aan 1 24 The Status Byte seu ra E ee AA A el weer de da 1 26 The Event Status Register and Event Status Register B 1 26 Error Output aa a de e a A RNA OR E A GE 1 27 Calibrations 4 e Pa ah Aa Bo aw a E O E A ee amp 1 28 Disk Ele Names aa AC a e a a 1 29 Using Key Codes ls o aoa a a ee Ar a Ts 1 30 Key Select Codes Arranged by Front Panel Hardkey 2 1 31 HP IB Only Commands a dos alos a a amp SOM ee ESE 1 49 Alphabetical Mnemonic Listing a aaa Bia ae we Be A we ork 1 55 2 HP BASIC Programming Examples Mmtroduchon s a ros aio Lal e a et Bee ah i ee eas 2 1 Required Equipment A ke ee A we a 2 1 Optiona
27. 1 66 marker bandwidth search 1 80 marker data 1 16 MARKER FCTN HP IB commands 1 42 MARKER HP IB commands 1 41 marker parameters print 1 72 marker range 1 66 markers continuous 1 66 discrete 1 66 displayed 1 60 markers coupled 1 66 marker search left 1 75 maximum 1 75 minimum 1 75 off 1 75 right 1 75 target 1 75 tracking 1 79 markers off 1 66 marker statistics 1 67 markers uncoupled 1 66 marker to CW frequency 1 66 marker to limit offset 1 64 marker to middle segment 1 66 marker to stimulus segment 1 66 marker width 1 80 marker zero 1 66 MARKFAUVID 1 66 MARKFSTI D 1 66 MARKFVALID 1 66 MARK lt Ii gt D 1 66 MARKMIDD 1 66 MARKMINI 1 66 MARKOFF 1 66 MARKREF 1 66 MARKSPAN 1 66 MARKSTAR 1 66 MARKSTIM 1 66 MARKSTOP 1 66 MARKUNCO 1 66 MARKZERO 1 66 MAXF D 1 66 MEASA 1 66 MEASB 1 67 MEAS HP IB commands 1 38 MEASR 1 67 MEASTAT 1 67 measurement calibration 1 28 measurement restart 1 74 memory channel 1 color 1 70 memory channel 2 color 1 70 MENU 1 67 MENUAVG 1 50 1 67 MENUCAL 1 50 1 67 MENUCOPY 1 50 1 67 MENUDISP 1 50 1 67 MENUFORM 1 50 1 67 MENUMARK 1 50 1 67 MENUMEAS 1 50 1 67 MENUMRKF 1 50 1 67 MENU lt ONIOFF gt 1 50 MENURECA 1 50 1 67 MENUSAVE 1 50 1 67 MENUSCAL 1 50 1 67 MENUSEQU 1 50 1 67 MENUSTIM 1 50 1 67 MENUSYST 1 50 1 67 message transfer scheme 1 8 meta messages 1 12 methods of HP IB operation
28. 10 TTLHPULS 1 80 TTLLPULS 1 80 types of syntax 1 5 U units 1 4 units as a function of display format 1 17 universal commands 1 12 UP 1 80 upper limit segment 1 64 Index 12 USEPASC 1 80 user defined cal kits 1 56 user defined kit save 1 74 user graphics include with disk files 1 61 USESENSA 1 80 USESENSB 1 80 use sensor A 1 80 use sensor B 1 80 V valid characters 1 4 velocity factor 1 80 VELOFACTID 1 80 W WAIT 1 80 waiting for group execute trigger 1 13 waiting for reverse get bit 1 13 warning color 1 70 warning beeper 1 55 WAVD 1 80 WAVE 1 80 WIDT 1 80 WIDVID 1 80 WINDMAXI 1 80 WINDMINI 1 80 WINDNORM 1 80 window maximum 1 80 minimum 1 80 normal 1 80 shape 1 80 value 1 80 WINDOWID 1 80 WINDUSEM 1 80 WRSK lt I gt 1 54 1 80 Z ZO 1 76 Contents 2 HP BASIC Programming Examples Introduction s as 246 Be Boe Bee He Ore BY Se AE CABRA 2 1 Required Equipment oaoa A a AE A A ee e 2 1 Optional Equipment A A ARA a a E 2 2 System Setup and HP IB Verification aooaa a a a a a o 2 2 HP 8752C Network Analyzer Instrument Control Using BASIC 2 4 Command Structure in BASIC cu sae Be Se OER a Oe wR 2 4 Command QUeKy z a a ee a ta ee BOE ERR 2 5 Running the Program dh de E de ee A Be ee A 2 6 Operation Complete sms AAA a A 2 7 Running the Program gnu a a a e 2 7 Preparing for Remote HP IB Control a a 2 7 VO Paths
29. 450 460 470 480 i This program is an example of using an SRQ based interrupt to 1 detect an error condition in the analyzer In this example a syntax error is generated with an invalid command The status byte is read in and tested The error queue is read printed out and then cleared t EXAMP4B i ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 Assign an I O path for the analyzer t CLEAR SCREEN Initialize the analyzer ABORT 7 Generate and IFC Interface Clear CLEAR QNwa SDC Selective Device Clear OUTPUT QNwa 0PC PRES Preset the analyzer and wait i ENTER Nwa Reply 1 DIM Error 50 Read the one from the analyzer em String for analyzer error message Set up syntax error interrupt OUTPUT Nwa CLES i Clear the status registers i Generate SRQ when bit 5 is set OUTPUT QNwa ESE 32 Event status register bit 5 enabled t Generate bit 5 in status register when syntax error occurs OUTPUT Nwa SRE 32 Status register bit 5 enabled t Setup the interrupt pointer to a subroutine ON INTR 7 GOSUB Srq_det When interrupt occurs go to Srq det Stat SPOLL Nwa Clear any pending SRQs ENABLE INTR 7 2 Set interrupt on HP IB bit 2 SRQ l DISP Waiting for bad syntax WAIT 2 Pause for 2 seconds i OUTPUT Nwa STIP 2GHZ Send bad STOP command syntax t WAIT 2 Pause for 2 seconds DISP i Clear display line GOTO Finish Exit program example 1 SEO AOR ROKK Subroutines A I I CCAR kk kkk kkk k t Srq_det i
30. A A a RO O ee C DO NA O DO DO E O PO E Tg am CT Oo o AE A O is E Td Key Select Codes Arranged by Front Panel Hardkey 4 HP IB Only Commands do en Fw amp OA DO AP wee em a a DR Alphabetical Mnemonic Listing 6 6 2 a ee ee Index Contents 2 Figures 1 1 HPD Bus Structure o Se sor A AE Bi GSO AAA 1 7 1 2 Analyzer Single Bus Concept aaa 1 10 1 3 FORM 4 ASCII Data Transfer Character String 1 16 1 4 The Data Processing Chain zu ass ps ars a a e a a SO 1 21 1 5 Status Reporting Structure 2 4 aa 1 24 16 Key Codes ss ss da ie o A O e A we BED 1 30 Tables EIN E FT TIC IN ET AA TEA TEC TE 1 1 Code Naming Convention rro 1 3 1 2 OPC compatible Commands 0 1 14 1 3 Units as a Function of Display Format 1 17 1 4 HP 8752C Network Analyzer Array Data Formats 2 ee ee 1 18 1 5 Status Bit Definitions posa amp oe a a ee IE JA ee eR es EY 1 25 1 6 Calibration ATTayS 220 UA A ee SM ee A 1 28 17 Disk File Nawies S eos g o sir ew A O AA AAA E A 1 29 1 8 Key S lect Codes papa si ee ts oe eS ae eR ARA 1 32 1 9 HP IB Only Commands scams e ee ee a EH a 0 1 49 Contents 3 HP IB Programming and Command Reference SS eae This chapter is a reference for operation of the net
31. BASIC revision being used For more information concerning the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus see Table 2 2 Table 2 1 Additional BASIC 6 2 Programming Information E Part Name HP BASIC 6 2 Programming Guide 98616 90610 HP BASIC 6 2 Language Reference 2 Volumes 98616 90004 Using HP BASIC for Instrument Control Volume I 82303 90001 Using HP BASIC for Instrument Control Volume ll 82303 90002 Table 2 2 Additional HP IB Information HP Part Number HP BASIC 6 2 Interface Reference 98616 90013 Tutorial Description of the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus 021 1927 Required Equipment To run the examples in this chapter in addition to the HP 8752C network analyzer the following equipment is required COMPU A NA Oa da HP 9000 Series 300 BASIC operating System SE AAA RATA AAA Oe BASIC 6 2 HP 87520 HP BASIC Programming Examples disk 0 0 0 ccc cee site 08752 1000 HP IB interconnect Cav lesson e235 ote vds A Area ds eases HP 10833A B C D o ciao es Said io sa ia ea da tke eee such as a 125 MHz bandpass filter HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 1 Note The HP 9000 Series 300 computer must have enough memory to store m BASIC 6 2 4 MBytes of memory is required m the required binaries Upon receipt make copies of the HP 8752C Programming Examples disks Label them HP 8752C Programming Examples BACKUP These disks will act as reserves in the event of loss or damage to the original disks Optiona
32. I gt These commands include the indicated information when a register is stored on disk See Figure 1 4 for data types EXTMDATA lt ON OFF gt Error corrected data EXTMDATO lt ON OFF gt Data array only EXTMFORM lt ONIOFF gt Formatted trace data EXTMGRAP lt ON OFF gt User graphics EXTMRAW lt ON OFF gt Raw data arrays EXTTHIGH Sets the external trigger line high EXTILOW Sets the external trigger line low EXTTOFF Deactivates the external trigger mode OPC compatible EXTTON Activates the external trigger on sweep mode OPC compatible EXTTPOIN Sets the external trigger to auto trigger on point OPC compatible FIXE Specifies a fixed load as opposed to a sliding load when defining a standard during a cal kit modification FOCU D Adjusts display focus 0 to 100 percent These commands set the data format for array transfers in and out of the instrument FORMI HP 8752C internal format Preceded by 4 byte header FORM2 32 bit floating point format Preceded by 4 byte header FORM3 64 bit floating point format Preceded by 4 byte header FORM4 ASCII format No header FORM5 32 bit floating point PC format Bytes reversed HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 61 These commands define the format to use on disk initializations FORMATDOS Selects DOS as the disk format FORMATLIF Selects LIF as the disk format FREO Frequency blank Turns OFF frequency notation FRER HP IB free run Acts the same as CONT FULP
33. Loop and wait for completion 430 STATUS 7 6 Hpib Read HP IB interface register 440 UNTIL BIT Hpib 6 Bit 6 is active controller 450 460 DISP Control returned from analyzer 470 OUTPUT ONwa TALKLIST Set talker listener mode again 480 OUTPUT QNwa CLES Clear status byte assignments 490 500 OUTPUT Nwa CONT Start analyzer sweeping again 510 OUTPUT Nwa OPC WAIT Wait for analyzer to finish 520 ENTER Nwa Reply Read the 1 when complete 530 540 LOCAL Nwa Release HP IB control 550 END Running the Program The analyzer will briefly flash the message WAITING FOR CONTROL before actually receiving control and generating the printer output The computer will display the Printing from analyzer and waiting for control message When the printer output is complete the analyzer passes control back to the address stored as the controller address under the menu The computer will detect the return of active contro and exit the wait loop The controller will display the message Control returned from analyzer and then release the analyzer from remote control Because the program waits for the analyzer s request for control it can be used to responding to front panel requests as well Remove the PRINALL command from the program and run the program again Nothing will happen until a print plot or disk access is requested from the analyzer s front panel For example press and PRINT 2 68 HP BASIC Programming E
34. Parameters o 4 2 14 Running THE Program a Gs A A A a we O S er a 2 15 Example 1B Verifying Parameters 0 A ee at a 2 16 Running the Program UA ra A el Be dee Gre a G 2 17 Example 2 Measurement Calibration 2 2 2 ee ee ee 2 18 Calibration kits E eg o SAS Gh ws Fh AA ee hE BA EO 2 18 Example 2A Response Measurement Calibration 2 19 Running the Program Soe ee ae Se ho A a oh we SE E a 2 20 Pl Example 2B Reflection 1 Port Measurement Calibration 2 21 3 Running the Program sa sr ee a A dra a 2 22 lt Contents 2 Example 3 Measurement Data Transfer 2 1 2 23 Trace Data Formats and Transfers ee ee 2 23 Example 3A Data Transfer Using Markers o o Oot ira 2 24 Running the Program e oS A a OH oS OS VD 2 25 Example 3B Data Transfer Using FORM 4 ASCII Transfer 2 26 Running the Program Ses ss aa RA A A ARAS E STS 2 28 Example 3C Data Transfer Using Floating Point Numbers 2 29 Running the Program a ke ee pete pa di e EA 2 31 Example 3D Data Transfer Using Frequency Array Information 2 32 Ru nning the Program a wee aria Se eh O be Vala V O E 2 34 Example 3E Data Transfer Using FORM 1 Internal Binary Format 2 35 Running the Program elo ale A a es js we e 2 36 Example 4 Measurement Process Synchronization en 2 37 Stat
35. Programming Examples The program is written as follows t i i 40 4 i This program shows how to create a limit table and send it to the i analyzer The operator enters the desired limits when prompted for i the stimulus value upper and lower value and type of limit desired Once the table is created the limits are sent to the analyzer and activated 1 EXAMP6C 90 ASSIGN QNwa TO 716 100 110 CLEAR SCREEN 120 1 Initialize the analyzer 130 ABORT 7 140 CLEAR Nwa 150 OUTPUT Nwa OPC PRES 160 ENTER Nwa Reply 170 180 OUTPUT Nwa EDITLIML 190 OUTPUT ONwa CLEL 200 INPUT NUMBER OF LIMITS Numb 210 ALLOCATE Table 1 Numb 1 3 220 ALLOCATE Limtype Numb 2 230 240 Print out the header for the table Am Assign an I O path for the analyzer Generate an IFC Interface clear SDC Selected Device Clear Preset the analyzer and wait Read the 1 when completed Edit limit lines Clear any existing limits Request the number of limits Create a table Create string array of limit types 250 PRINT USING 10A 20A 15A 20A SEG STIMULUS MHz UPPER dB LOWER dB 260 270 UPYpERU 280 FOR I 1 TO Numb Prompt the operator to enter the limit values Cycle through the limits Go read limit values Next limit value Cycle to edit limit lines 290 GOSUB Loadlimit 300 NEXT I 310 320 Allow the operator to edit the array entered 330 LOOP
36. SAV1 1 74 SAVC 1 74 save cal kit 1 74 save colors 1 78 save format 1 74 SAVE lt I gt 1 74 SAVE RECALL HP IB commands 1 43 SAVEREG lt I gt 1 74 save register 1 74 save sequence 1 78 SAVEUSEK 1 74 SAVUASCI 1 74 SAVUBINA 1 74 SCAL D 1 74 scale auto 1 55 SCALE REF HP IB commands 1 44 SCAP 1 74 SDEL 1 74 SDON 1 74 SEAL 1 75 SEAMAX 1 75 SEAMIN 1 75 SEAOFF 1 75 SEAR 1 75 SEATARGID 1 75 SEDI D 1 75 segment add 1 74 delete 1 74 edit 1 75 index 19 segment edit done 1 60 segment select 1 77 select first point D 1 75 select last point D 1 75 select point number D 1 75 select segment number D 1 75 select sequence 1 73 1 75 select standard 1 77 SELL D 1 49 SELMAXPT D 1 53 1 75 SELMINPT D 1 53 1 75 SELPT D 1 53 1 75 SELSEG D 1 53 1 75 sensor input selection 1 80 SEQ HP IB commands 1 44 SEQ lt I gt 1 75 sequence wait 1 75 SEQWAIT D 1 75 serial poll 1 13 service request asserted by the analyzer S 1 10 service request SRQ control line 1 7 set bandwidth 1 62 SETBIT D 1 76 SETF 1 76 setting HP IB addresses 1 12 SETZ D 1 76 SH1 full source handshake 1 9 SHOM 1 76 show menus 1 76 SING 1 76 single bus concept 1 10 single point type 1 64 SLID 1 76 sliding load 1 76 done 1 76 set 1 76 SLIL 1 76 SLIS 1 76 SLOPE D 1 76 sloping line type 1 64 SLOPO 1 76 SMIC 1 76 SMIMGB 1 76 SMIMLIN 1 76 SMIMLOG 1 76 SMIMRI 1 76
37. SRQ handler Stat SPOLL Nwa Read serial poll byte from HP 1B PRINT Stat from Serial Poll Stat IF BIT Stat 6 THEN Test for SRQ PRINT SRQ received from analyzer 2 42 HP BASIC Programming Examples 490 ELSE No SRQ from analyzer 500 PRINT SRQ from other device 510 STOP Stop if not from analyzer 520 END IF 530 540 IF BIT Stat 5 THEN Event status register bit set 550 PRINT Event Status Register caused SRQ 560 ELSE Some other bit set 570 PRINT Some other bit caused the SRQ 580 STOP Stop if bit not set 590 END IF 600 610 REPEAT 620 OUTPUT QNva DUTPERRO 630 ENTER ONwa Err Error 640 PRINT Err Error 650 UNTIL Err 0 Read analyzer error queue Read error number and string Print error message No more errors in queue 660 670 PRINT White space 680 ENABLE INTR 7 2 Re enable SRQ interrupt on HP IB 690 RETURN 700 710 Doo End Subroutines 633 of ok kkk ak ok ak ok a de a a kok k k a e ok 720 730 Finish End of program and exit 740 DISP Finished 750 OFF INTR 7 i Turn off interrupt 760 LOCAL QNwa Release HP IB control 770 END Running the Program Run the program The computer will preset the analyzer then pause for a second or two After pausing the program sends an invalid command string STIP 2 GHZ to cause a syntax error This command is intended to be STOP 2 GHZ The computer will display a series of messages from the SRQ handler routine The analyzer will
38. a marker search is required the marker output command can be used to read the information If ali the trace data is required see Examples 3B through 3E Trace Data Formats and Transfers Refer to Table 1 4 This table shows the number of bytes required to transfer a 201 point trace in the different formats As you will see in the first example FORM 4 ASCII data is the easiest to transfer but the most time consuming due to the number of bytes in the trace If you are using a PC based controller a more suitable format would be FORM 5 To use any trace data format other than FORM 4 ASCII data requires some care in transferring the data to the computer Data types must be matched to read the bytes from the analyzer directly in to the variable array The computer must be told to stop formatting the incoming data and treat it as a binary data transfer All of the other data formats also have a four byte header to deal with The first two bytes are the ASCII characters A that indicate that a fixed length block transfer follows and the next two bytes form an integer containing the number of bytes in the block to follow The header must be read in to separate the header from the rest of the block data to be mapped into an array Array Data Formats located in chapter 1 discusses the different types of formats and their compositions Data may also be transferred from several different locations in the trace processing chain These examples will
39. a oe A SE SE de OO LO 2 22 Example 3 Measurement Data Transfer ee ee eee 2 23 Trace Data Formats and Transfers ee ee ee 2 23 Example 3A Data Transfer Using Markers 2 24 Running the Program AI SE E Ee Be eed 2 25 Example 3B Data Transfer Using FORM 4 ASCII Transfer 2 26 Roa AAA O 2 28 Example 3C Data Transfer Using Floating Point Numbers 2 29 Running the Program E AA A A 2 31 Example 3D Data Transfer Using Frequency Array Information 2 32 Running the ProsraMm sw s scu ocw a a MOE EU AA 2 34 Contents 1 Example 3E Data Transfer Using FORM 1 Internal Binary Format Running the Program sas Gok as a e IA A AR Example 4 Measurement Process Synchronization 2 Status Reporting a seis as a a a a E Example 4A Using the Error Queue eee Running the Program sap uses rr A Ba A Example 4B Generating Interrupts cc eo Running the Program gama eee a ee ee O ED A Example 5 Network Analyzer System Setups 2 ee ee a Saving and Recalling Instrument States 2 ee sra Example 5A Using the Learn String ee ee ee ee es Running the Program sie Sen ye a E a ak A SG AA Example 5B Reading Calibration Data 2 1 a k Running the Program sam e A A Se 36 e E Running the Program 4 6 6 ft seara ee ea eo Example 6 Limit Line Testing o 1 6 6 ee
40. a table of list frequency segments which is then loaded into the analyzer s list frequency table There are a maximum of 30 segments available Each segment stipulates a start and stop frequency and the number of data points to be taken over that frequency range Example 6B lets the operator select a specific segment to zoom in on A single instrument can programmed to measure several different devices each with its own frequency range using a single calibration performed with all of the segments active When a specific device is connected the operator selects the appropriate segment for that device Note that list frequency segments can be overlapped but the total number of points in all the segments must not exceed 1632 Example 6A Setting Up a List Frequency Sweep Note This program is stored as EXAMP6A on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer The purpose of this example is to show how to create a list frequency table and transmit it to the analyzer The command sequence for entering a list frequency table imitates the key sequence followed when entering a table from the front panel there is a command for every key press Editing a segment is also the same as the front panel key sequence but remember the analyzer automatically reorders each edited segment in order of increasing start frequency The list frequency table is also carried as part of the learn string While the table c
41. and then the unlabeled key several times quickly and watch the display The number of errors observed should correspond to the number of times you pressed the key As another example press CAL Then the calibration Press without performing any calibrations Note the error message on the analyzer and on the controller display Push the E We are not concerned with the validity of the calibration just setting a simple calibration on the analyzer Note that COR is displayed in the upper left hand section of the graticule Now press and 7 This will generate an error because the start frequency has been changed invalidating the calibration This error is reported on the controller display as well A complete list of error messages and their descriptions can be found in Chapter 10 of the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide The program is in an infinite loop waiting for errors to occur End the program by halting it with RESET or BREAK key and then A ie cee eon Note Not all messages displayed by the analyzer are put in the error queue operator prompts and cautions are not included 2 40 HP BASIC Programming Examples Example 4B Generating Interrupts Note This program is stored as EXAMP4B on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer It is also possible to generate interrupts using the status reporting mechanism The status byte bits can be enabled to generate a se
42. arrays to disk file ASSIGN File TO Close file t INPUT Cal data received Press ENTER to send it back A Read arrays from file i 2 50 HP BASIC Programming Examples 510 DIM Learn2 3000 String for learn string storage 520 ASSIGN File TO DATA_FILE 1406 Open file for reading arrays 530 ENTER File Learn2 Read learn string from file 540 550 ENTER File Head Length Read CAL data headers from file 560 Size Length 16 Array is 2 numbers 8 bytes per number 570 ALLOCATE Cal_array2 1 Size 1 2 new cal array from file record 580 ENTER File Cal_array2 Read cal array from disk file 590 600 Send Learn string back 610 OUTPUT Nwa INPULEAS Learn2 Send learn string array 620 630 Send Cal array back 640 OUTPUT Nwa CALIRESP Send CAL type Response 650 OUTPUT Nwa INPUCALCO1 Output CAL array to analyzer 660 OUTPUT ONwa_bin Head Length Cal_array2 670 OUTPUT Nwa OPC 7 SAVC Save the CAL array 680 ENTER Nwa Reply Read the 1 when complete 690 700 OUTPUT Nwa CONT t Start the analzyer sweeping 710 OUTPUT ONwa OPC WAIT Wait for the analyzer to finish 720 ENTER ONwa Reply 730 LOCAL Nwa Release HP 1B control 740 END Running the Program Setup the analyzer and perform a thorough calibration Run the program The program prompts the operator to change the state of the analyzer and then press to continue At this point the analyzer state is stored on the disk
43. command formats and operations Appending a to a command that sets an analyzer parameter will return the value of that setting Parameters that are set as ON or OFF when queried will return a zero 0 if OFF or a one 1 if active Parameters are returned in ASCII format FORM 4 This format is varying in length from 1 to 24 characters per value In the case of marker or other multiple responses the values are separated by commas The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence m An I O path is assigned for the analyzer m The system is initialized The number of points in the trace is queried and dumped to a printer m The start frequency is queried and output to a printer w The averaging is queried and output to a printer u The analyzer is released from remote control and the program ends The program is written as follows 10 This program performs some example queries of network analyzer 20 settings The number of points in a trace the start frequency 30 and if averaging is turned on are determined and displayed 40 50 EXAMPIB 60 4 70 ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 Assign an I O path for the analyzer 80 90 CLEAR SCREEN 100 Initialize the system 110 ABORT 7 120 CLEAR Nwa 130 OUTPUT Nwa OPC PRES 140 ENTER ONwa Reply Generate an IFC Interface Clear SDC Selected Device Clear Preset the analyzer and wait Read in the 1 returned ek em er amm 150 160 Query network an
44. data is always returned in FORM 4 ASCII format Each number is sent as a 24 character string Characters can be digits signs or decimal points All characters should be separated by commas In the case of markers three numbers are sent The display format determines the values of the marker responses See Table 1 4 HP 8752C Network Analyzer Array Data Formats When using trace data it is important to control the network analyzer s sweep function and therefore the trace data from the computer Using the computer to control the instrument s sweep insures that the data you read into the controller is in a quiescent or steady state It also insures that the measurement is complete The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence m An I O path is assigned for the analyzer The system is initialized m The selected frequency span is swept once z The marker is activated and placed on the maximum trace value a The three marker values are output to the controller and displayed m The instrument is returned to local control and the program ends 2 24 HP BASIC Programming Examples The program is written as follows 10 This program takes a sweep on the analyzer and turns on a marker 20 The marker is positioned on the trace maximum and the marker data 30 is output in ASCII format 40 50 EXAMP3A 60 4 70 ASSIGN ONwa TO 716 Assign an I O path for the analyzer 80 90 CLEAR SCREEN 100 I
45. following is an outline of the program s processing sequence m An I O path is assigned for the analyzer m The system is initialized m The analyzer is adjusted to measure return loss on channel 1 and display it in log magnitude The analyzer is adjusted to measure return loss on channel 2 and display the phase n The dual channel display mode is activated m The system operator is prompted to enter the frequency range of the measurement m The displays are autoscaled m The analyzer is released from remote control and the program ends 2 14 HP BASIC Programming Examples The program is written as follows 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 This program selects the type of measurement the display format and then sets the specified start and stop frequencies EXAMP1A ASSIGN QNwa TO 716 t CLEAR SCREEN Initialize the system ABORT 7 CLEAR QNwa OUTPUT Nwa OPC 7 PRES ENTER Nwa Reply i Set up measurement and display OUTPUT Nwa CHANi OUTPUT Nwa RFLP OUTPUT Nwa LOGM t OUTPUT ONwa CHAN2 OUTPUT Nwa RFLP OUTPUT Nwa PHAS t OUTPUT Nwa DUACON t t Request start and stop frequency em amm sm l i The analyzer display is then autoscaled t t Assign an 1 0 path for the analyzer Generate an IF
46. formats If you are using a PC based controller FORM 5 is the most effective format to use The analyzer terminates each transmission by asserting the EOI interface line with the last byte transmitted Table 1 4 offers a comparative overview of the five array data formats Table 1 4 HP 8752C Network Analyzer Array Data Formats Format type Type of Data Bytes per Bytes per point 201 pts Total Bytes Data Value 2 data values Bytes per trace with header Internal Binary 1206 1210 IEEE 32 bit 1608 1612 Floating Point IEEE 64 bit 16 3216 3220 Floating Point ASCII Numbers 50 10 050 10 050 Typical Typical Typical Typical PC DOS 32 bit 4 8 1608 1612 Floating Point No header is used in FORM 4 1 18 HP IB Programming and Command Reference Trace Data Transfers Transferring trace data from the analyzer using an instrument controller can be divided into three steps 1 allocating an array to receive and store the data 2 commanding the analyzer to transmit the data 3 accepting the transferred data Data residing in the analyzer is always stored in pairs for each data point to accommodate real imaginary pairs Hence the receiving array has to be two elements wide and as deep as the number of points in the array being transferred Memory space for the array must be declared before any data can be transferred from the analyzer to the computer As mentioned earlier the analyzer can transmit data over HP IB
47. illustrate formatted data transfers but other locations in the trace data processing chains may be accessed See Figure 1 4 In this section an example of each of the data formats will be shown for comparison A general rule of thumb is to use FORM 1 internal binary format for traces that are not being utilized for data content Learn strings state transfers and calibration data that are being transferred to a file and back are good examples See Example 3D Arrays which will be interpreted or processed within your program should be in FORM 2 3 or 5 whichever is appropriate for your computer Example 3C shows how to transfer a trace in these formats In Examples 3B and 3C the frequency counterpart of each data point in the array is also determined Many applications generate a frequency and magnitude or a phase array for the test results Such data may be required for other data processing applications such as comparing data from other measurements In Example 3B the frequency data is constructed from the frequency span information Alternatively it is possible to read the frequencies directly out of the instrument with the OUTPLIML command OUTPLIML reports the limit test results by transmitting the stimulus point tested a number indicating the limit test results and then the upper and lower limits at that stimulus point if available The number indicating the limit results is a 1 for no test 0 for fail and 1 for pass If th
48. list 1 57 clear register 1 57 clear sequence 1 57 2 7 CLEASEQ lt I gt 1 57 CLEL 1 57 CLES 1 54 1 57 CLS 1 57 COAX 1 57 CO D 1 56 code naming conventions 1 3 code syntax structure 1 4 COLOCHID 1 58 COLOCHIM 1 58 COLOCH2D 1 58 COLOCH2M 1 58 COLOGRAT 1 58 color data channel 1 1 70 data channel 2 1 70 graticule 1 70 memory channel 1 1 70 memory channel 2 1 70 text 1 70 warning 1 70 COLOR D 1 58 colors 1 70 COLOTEXT 1 58 COLOWARN 1 58 command 1 15 command formats 1 4 command query 1 15 commands HP IB 1 1 command structure 2 4 command structure elements 2 4 appendage 2 4 BASIC command statement 2 4 data 2 4 terminators 2 4 unit 2 4 command syntax 1 3 command syntax structure 1 4 compatible peripherals 2 2 complete operation 1 14 complete service request capabilities SR1 1 9 computer controllers 1 6 connecting the device under test 2 10 connecting the test system 2 2 CONS 1 58 CONSTANTS 2 83 CONT 1 58 continue sequence 1 58 controlled sweep 2 13 controller address 1 55 controller interface function 1 6 control lines 1 7 CONVIDS 1 58 conventions for code naming 1 3 CONVOFF 1 58 CONVREF 1 58 CONVYTRA 1 58 CONVZTRA 1 58 copy display 1 69 1 71 1 72 COPYFRFT 1 58 COPYFRRT 1 58 COPY HP IB commands 1 35 CORI 1 58 CORR 1 58 correction 1 58 interpolative 1 58 correction of errors example program 2 18 COUC 1 58 COUP 1 58 coupled chan
49. measurement calibration 1 28 measurement calibration example program 2 18 measurement data post processing 2 11 measurement data taking 2 11 measurement parameters required order 2 14 setting 2 14 verifying 2 16 measurement process 2 10 measurement restart 1 74 measurement setup 2 14 measurement specifications 2 28 group delay 2 28 magnitude 2 28 phase 2 28 memory channel 1 color 1 70 memory channel 2 color 1 70 memory requirements 2 1 MENU 1 67 MENUAVG 1 50 1 67 MENUCAL 1 50 1 67 MENUCOPY 1 50 1 67 MENUDISP 1 50 1 67 MENUFORM 1 50 1 67 MENUMARK 1 50 1 67 MENUMEAS 1 50 1 67 MENUMRKF 1 50 1 67 MENU lt ONI OFF gt 1 50 MENURECA 1 50 1 67 MENUSAVE 1 50 1 67 MENUSCAL 1 50 1 67 MENUSEQU 1 50 1 67 MENUSTIM 1 50 1 67 MENUSYST 1 50 1 67 message transfer scheme 1 8 meta messages 1 12 methods of HP IB operation 1 6 middle value segment 1 64 index 8 MINF D 1 67 MINMAX lt ONIOFF gt 1 53 1 67 2 78 min max recording 1 67 modes analyzer bus 1 11 debug 2 13 pass control 1 11 system controller 1 10 talker listener 1 11 modes for bus device 1 10 MODI1 1 67 modify cal kit 1 67 modify colors 1 58 modify sequence 1 67 multiple controller capability 1 8 N naming conventions 1 3 NEWSEQ lt I gt 1 67 new sequence 1 67 NEXP 1 67 next page 1 67 no extended talker capabilities TEO 1 9 NOOP 1 67 number of HP IB devices allowed 1 6 number of lis
50. of ASCII characters 24 characters per data point and transferred into a real array in the controller The corresponding frequency data is calculated from the analyzer settings E E E ET anti ee EXAMP3B ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 Assign an 1 0 path to the analyzer 1 CLEAR SCREEN Initialize ABORT 7 Generate an IFC Interface Clear CLEAR Nwa SDC Selective Device Clear OUTPUT Nwa OPC PRES ENTER Nwa Reply t Trace values are two elements per po display format dependent DIM Dat 1 11 1 2 i Trace data array Preset the analyzer Read the 1 when complete emm sm a o 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 OUTPUT Nwa POIN 11 t Set trace length to 11 points OUTPUT Nwa OPC SING Single sweep mode and wait ENTER Nwa Reply Read reply OUTPUT QNwa FORM4 Set form 4 ASCII format OUTPUT Nwa OUTPFORM 1 Send formatted trace to controller ENTER ONva Dat x Read in data array from analyzer i Now to calculate the frequency increments between points OUTPUT Nwa POIN Read number of points in the trace ENTER Nwa Num points OUTPUT Nwa STAR Read the start frequency ENTER QNwa Startf OUTPUT QNwa SPAN Read the span ENTER QNwa Span l F_inc Span Num_points 1 Calculate fixed frequency increment PRINT Point Freq MHz Value 1 Value 2 IMAGE 3D 7X 5D 3D 3X 3D 4D 3X 3D 4D Formatting for controller display y FOR I 1 TO Num_points Loop throug
51. offset 1 71 PLOS 1 71 PLOT 1 71 plot data 1 70 plot file and PC graphics example program 2 71 index 9 plot graticule 1 71 plot markers 1 71 plot memory 1 71 plot quadrant 1 64 1 74 plot scale 1 74 plot softkeys 1 72 plot speed 1 71 plot string output 1 69 plotter address 1 55 auto feed 1 71 form feed 1 71 plotter default setup 1 59 plotter port disk 1 71 HP IB 1 71 plotter type 1 71 plot text 1 73 plotting to a file 2 69 plotting remote 2 64 2 66 plot to disk title 1 79 PLIPRTDISK 1 71 PLIPRTHPIB 1 71 PLTTRAUTF 1 71 PLITRFORF 1 71 PLITYPHPGL 1 71 PLITYPPLIR 1 71 PMEM 1 71 PMKR 1 71 PMTRTTIT 1 71 POIN D 1 71 points specify 1 71 POLA 1 71 polar 1 71 polar markers 1 71 POLMLIN 1 71 POLMLOG 1 71 POLMRI 1 71 PORE 1 71 PORTI D 1 71 PORT2 D 1 71 port extensions 1 71 PORTR D 1 71 PORTT D 1 71 post processing the measurement data 2 11 POWE D 1 71 power level 1 71 power loss range edit 1 71 power loss table 1 73 edit 1 71 Index 10 power meter address 1 55 power meter cal factor 1 56 power meter into title string 1 71 power meter type 1 72 power ranges 1 72 power slope 1 76 power sweep 1 72 power trip 1 72 POWLFREQID 1 71 POWLLIST 1 71 POWLLOSS D 1 71 POWM 1 72 POWS 1 72 POWT 1 72 POWT lt ON OFF gt 1 50 PPO does not respond to parallel poll 1 9 PRAN 1 72 preparing for remote operation 2 7 presetting t
52. one event long Therefore the next output request will clear the current data The summary bit is set whenever there is data in the output queue The Event Status Register and Event Status Register B The event status register and event status register B are the other two registers in the status reporting structure They are selectively summarized by bits in the status byte via enable registers The event status registers consist of latched bits A latched bit is set at the beginning of a specific trigger condition in the instrument It can only be cleared by reading the register The bit will not be reactivated until the condition occurs again If a bit in one of these two registers is enabled it is summarized by the summary bit in the status byte The registers are enabled using the commands ESEnn and ESNBnn both of which work in the same manner as SREnn The units variable nn represents the binary equivalent of the bit in the status byte If a bit in one of the event status registers is enabled and therefore summary bit in the status byte is enabled an SRQ will be generated The SRQ will not be cleared until one of the five following conditions transpire 1 The event status register is read clearing the latched bit 2 The summary bit in the status byte is disabled 3 The event status register bit is disabled 4 The status registers are cleared with the CLES command 5 An instrument preset is performed 1 26 HP4B Programmin
53. or PRINALL The entire list can be printed in ASCH text mode with PRINTALL Outputs the value of the active function or the last active function if the active entry area is OFF Outputs the max values for all limit line segments Outputs the min values for all limit line segments Outputs the smoothing aperture in stimulus units rather than as a percentage These commands output the error correction arrays for the active calibration on the active channel See Table 1 6 for the contents of the arrays Each array comes out in the current output format They contain real imaginary pairs the same number of pairs as points in the sweep OUTPCALCO1 OUTPCALCO2 OUTPCALCO3 OUTPCALK OUTPDATA OUTPDATF OUTPDATP OUTPDATR OUTPERRO OUTPFAIP OUTPFORF OUTPFORM Array 1 Array 2 Array 3 Outputs the currently active calibration kit as a less than 1000 byte string The data is in form 1 Outputs the error corrected data from the active channel in the current format See Figure 1 4 Fast data transfer command for OUTPDATA Outputs the trace data indexed by point see SELPT D Outputs the trace data for range of points see SELMINPT D SELMAXPTID Outputs the oldest error message in the error queue Sends first the error number and then the error message itself as a string no longer than 50 characters This command is similar to OUTPLIMF except that it reports the number of failures first followed by the
54. program tests to see if an error is present in the queue w The error queue bit is set m The program requests the contents of the error queue a The error number and string are read The error messages are printed until there are no more errors in the queue s The instrument is returned to local control m The controller emits a beep to attract the attention of the operator and resumes searching for errors 2 38 HP BASIC Programming Examples The program is written as follows 10 This program is an example of using the error queue to detect 20 errors generated by the analyzer The status byte is read and 30 bit 3 is tested to determine if an error exists The error queue 40 is printed out and emptied 50 2 60 EXAMP4A 70 80 ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 t Assign an 1 0 path for the analyzer 90 100 CLEAR SCREEN 110 Initialize the analyzer 120 ABORT 7 130 CLEAR Nwa 140 OUTPUT GNwa OPC PRES 150 ENTER ONwa Reply Generate an IFC Interface Clear SDC Selective Device Clear Preset the analyzer and wait Read the 1 when complete o us 160 170 DIM Error 50 String for analyzer error message 180 190 LOCAL Nwa Release analyzer from remote control 200 210 LOOP Endless loop to read error queue 220 REPEAT 230 Stat SPOLL Nwa Read status byte with serial poll 240 UNTIL BIT Stat 3 Test for error queue present 250 o 260 Error queue bit is set Aa l 270 REPEAT Loop until error nu
55. separated by a comma and terminated with a line feed LF Marker data The network analyzer offers several options for outputting trace related data Data can be selectively read from the trace using the markers or the entire trace can be read by the controller If only specific information is required such as a single point on the trace or the result of a marker search the marker output command can be used to read the information Specific data points can be read using the OUTPDATP or OUTPDATR commands These commands allow a much faster data transfer than when using markers to output specific data points For more information on these commands see Limit Line and Data Point Special Functions located in Chapter 2 A marker must first be assigned to the desired frequency before it can be used to read the trace data This is accomplished using the marker commands The controller sends a marker command followed by a frequency within the trace data range If the actual desired frequency was not sampled the markers can be set to continuous mode and the desired marker value will be linearly interpolated from the two nearest points This interpolation can be prevented by putting the markers into discrete mode Discrete mode allows the marker to only be Positioned on a measured trace data point As an alternative the analyzer can be programmed to choose the stimulus value by using the MARKER SEARCH function Maximum minimum target value or
56. sequence wait 1 75 SEQWAITID 1 75 serial poll 1 13 2 37 service request 2 41 service request asserted by the analyzer S 1 10 service request SRQ control line 1 7 set bandwidth 1 62 SETBIT D 1 76 SETF 1 76 setting addresses 2 2 setting HP IB addresses 1 12 setting the control mode 2 2 setting up the instrument 2 10 setting up the system 2 2 SETZ D 1 76 SH1 full source handshake 1 9 SHOM 1 76 show menus 1 76 SING 1 76 single bus concept 1 10 single point type 1 64 SLID 1 76 sliding load 1 76 done 1 76 set 1 76 SLIL 1 76 SLIS 1 76 SLOPEID 1 76 sloping line type 1 64 SLOPO 1 76 SMIC 1 76 SMIMGB 1 76 SMIMLIN 1 76 SMIMLOG 1 76 SMIMRI 1 76 SMIMRX 1 76 Smith chart 1 76 Smith markers 1 76 SMOOAPER D 1 76 SMOOO 1 76 smoothing 1 76 smoothing aperture 1 76 SOFR 1 49 1 76 SOFT lt I gt 1 76 SOFT 1 54 SOUP 1 76 source power on off 1 76 SPAN D 1 76 SPECFWDT 1 77 Index 12 specify class 1 77 specify gate menu 1 77 specify points 1 71 SPECRESIUN 1 77 SPECRESP I 1 77 SPECSLIA I 1 77 SPECS11B 1 1 77 SPECS11C 0 1 77 SPEG 1 77 SPLD 1 77 split display 1 77 SR1 complete service request capabilities 1 9 SRE D 1 54 SRQ service request control line 1 7 SSEG D 1 77 S service request asserted by the analyzer 1 10 STANA 1 77 STANB 1 77 STANC 1 77 STAND 1 77 standard defined 1 77 standard definition 1 59 sta
57. set The default analyzer addresses are m 16 for the instrument 17 for the display Caution Other devices connected to the bus cannot occupy the same address as the analyzer The analyzer displays the instrument s address in the upper right section of the display If the address is not 16 return the address to its default setting 16 by pressing DODEED b Set the system control mode to either pass control or talker listener mode These are the only control modes in which the analyzer will accept commands over HP IB For more information on control modes see Chapter 1 HP IB Programming and Command Reference To set the system control mode press or 5 Check the interface bus by performing a simple command from the computer controller Type the following command on the controller dl OUTPUT 716 PRES or Note HP 9000 Series 300 computers use the key as both execute and enter Some other computers may have an ENTER EXECUTE or key that performs the same function For reasons of simplicity the notation is used throughout this chapter This command should preset the analyzer If an instrument preset does not occur there is a problem Check all HP IB addresses and connections Most HP IB problems are caused by an incorrect address and faulty loose HP IB cables HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 3 HP 8752C Network Analyzer Instrument Control Using BASIC A remote controller
58. such as save done with calibration standard and data trace saved A limit test failure The generation of a warning message Measure and display B R on the active channel HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 55 These commands set the open capacitance values of an open circuit while it is being defined as a calibration standard CO D C1 D C2 D C3 D CALI Accepted for compatibility with the HP 8510A where its function is to begin a calibration sequence These commands set the power meter calibration factor corrections for the particular sensor used Sensor B is only valid for the HP 438A which has two input channels CALFCALF D CALFFREQ D CALFSENA CALFSENB Set the calibration factor Select the frequency for the calibration factor correction Edit the sensor A calibration factor table Edit the sensor B calibration factor table These commands begin a calibration sequence CALIRAI CALIRESP CALIS111 Response and isolation Response Reflection 1 port These commands select a default calibration kit CALK35MD CALK35MM CALK7MM CALKN50 CALKN75 CALKUSED CALN CBRI D CENT D CHANI CHAN2 CHOPAB CLAD 3 5 mm HP 85033D 3 5 mm HP 850330 7 mm Type N 50 ohm Type N 75 ohm User defined calibration kit Calibration none Turns calibration type to OFF Adjusts the color brightness of the selected display feature Sets the center stimulus value If a list frequen
59. sweeping error corrects the data then formats and displays the data Sets the display intensity 0 to 100 percent Selects the internal memory as the active storage device Done with isolation subsequence in a 2 port calibration OPC compatible Sends a keycode equivalent to actually pressing the key It does not matter if the front panel is in remote mode See Figure 1 6 for the key codes Calibration kit done the last step in modifying a cal kit Outputs a two byte key code knob count If the number is positive it is a key code Otherwise it has to be converted to a knob count by clearing the upper 8 bits if bit 14 is not set The resulting integer is the knob count either positive or negative depending on the direction of turn There are approximately 120 counts per knob turn HP4B Programming and Command Reference 1 63 These commands enter labels for the standard classes during a cal kit modification LABEFWDTIS LABERESIIS LABERESP LABESIIAIS LABES11B 5 LABES11C LABK LABS LEFL LEFU LIMIAMPO D LIMILINE lt ON OFF gt LIMIMAOF D LIMISTIO D LIMITEST lt ON OFF gt Forward transmission Response response and isolation Response Reflection opens Reflection shorts Reflection loads Enters a cal kit label during a cal kit modification Enters a standard s label during standard definition Selects a plot in the left lower quadrant Selects a plot in the left upper q
60. t 340 INPUT DO YOU WANT TO EDIT Y OR N An 350 EXIT IF An N 360 370 INPUT ENTRY NUMBER I GOSUB Loadlimit 380 END LOOP 390 400 410 OUTPUT OQNwa EDITLIML 420 FOR I 1 TO Numb l Exit loop on N and send to analyzer Read limit number to edit Go read limit values Next edit entry Send the limit line array segments da the analyzer 1 Edit the limit 1 E Each segment of the limit 430 OUTPUT Nwa SADD Add segment 440 OUTPUT CNwa LIMS Table 1 1 MHZ Send segment stimulus value 450 OUTPUT ONwa LIMU Table 1 2 DB Upper limit value 460 OUTPUT ONwa LIML Table 1 3 DB Lower limit value 470 IF Limtype 1 FL THEN OUTPUT QNwa LIMTFL Flat limit 480 IF Limtype I SL THEN OUTPUT Nwa LIMTSL Sloping limit 490 IF Limtype 1 SP THEN OUTPUT Nwa LIMTSP Point limit 500 OUTPUT QNwa SDON t Segment done 510 NEXT I next segment 520 HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 59 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 OUTPUT QONwa EDITDONE Edit complete OUTPUT Nwa LIMILINEON t Turn limit line on OUTPUT QNva LIMITESTON 1 Turn limit test on 1 OUTPUT ONwa 0PC WAIT Wait for the analyzer to finish ENTER Nwa Reply Read the 1 when complete t LOCAL Nwa i Release HP 1B control STOP End of main program Lio owed Subroutines Rae o aah fede ae aah de a je Loadlimit Sub to interact to l
61. table s r Safety Notes The following safety symbols are used throughout this manual Familiarize yourself with each of the symbols and its meaning before operating this instrument Caution Caution denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure that if not correctly performed or adhered to would result in damage to or destruction of the instrument Do not proceed beyond a caution note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met Warning Warning denotes a hazard It calls attention to a procedure which if not correctly performed or adhered to could result in injury or loss of life Do not proceed beyond a warning note until the indicated conditions are fully understood and met General Safety Considerations Warning This is a Safety Class I product provided with a protective earthing ground incorporated in the power cord The mains plug shall only be inserted in a socket outlet provided with a protective earth contact Any interruption of the protective conductor inside or outside the instrument is likely to make the instrument dangerous Intentional interruption is prohibited Warning No operator serviceable parts inside Refer servicing to qualified personnel To prevent electrical shock do not remove covers Caution Before switching on this instrument make sure that the line voltage selector switch is set to the voltage of the power supply and the correct fuse is installed Warnin
62. terminates each segment data result 2 86 HP BASIC Programming Examples Output Minimum and Maximum Point Per Limit Segment The command MINMAX lt ON OFF gt toggles a feature which records the minimum and maximum data points in all active limit segments Note that limit testing need not be turned on The command OUTPSEGM will report the min max data for the segment previously selected by SELSEG N The data is returned in a comma delimited string with the segment number minimum point stimulus minimum trace value maximum point stimulus and maximum trace value Under the following conditions OUTPSEGM will issue the following errors m If the min max testing is OFF 30 Requested Data Not Currently Available To clear the error message turn the min max testing ON w If the limit table is empty 204 Limit Table Empty this is a new message To clear the error message enter a new limit table When the above error conditions occur there is no data to report thus no output is generated If the selected segment has no associated limit the NO_DATA string is generated which E reports a stimulus value of O and a data value of 1000 Example Sending SELSEG3 and OUTPSEGM may return the following 3 1 900000000E 09 9 900000E 01 2 123456789E 09 2 123456E 00 For an explanation of these results see Table 2 10 Table 2 10 Example Output OUTPSEGM min max per segment SEGMENT MIN PT STIMULUS
63. the HP IB status indicators illuminate to display the current status of the analyzer The HP IB status indicators are located in the instrument state function block on the front panel of the network analyzer R Remote Operation L Listen mode T Talk mode S Service request SRQ asserted by the analyzer Bus Device Modes The analyzer uses a single bus architecture The single bus allows both the analyzer and the host controller to have complete access to the peripherals in the system Three different controller modes are possible in and HP IB system m system controller mode m talker listener mode a pass control mode GRAPHICS PLOTTER PRINTER DISK DRIVE A A I HP 8752C NETWORK ANALYZER HOST CONTROLLER lt h83c Figure 1 2 Analyzer Single Bus Concept 1 10 HPAB Programming and Command Reference System Controller Mode This mode allows the analyzer to control peripherals directly in a stand alone environment without an external controller This mode can only be selected manually from the analyzer s front panel It can only be used if no active computer or instrument controller is connected to the system via HP IB If an attempt is made to set the network analyzer to the system controller mode when another controller is connected to the interface the following message is displayed on the analyzer s display screen ANOTHER SYSTEM CONTROLLER ON HP IB BUS The analyzer must be set to the system co
64. the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus presents a description and discussion of all aspects of the HP IB A thorough overview of all technical details as a broad tutorial HP publication HP part number 5021 1927 a JEEE Standard Digital Interface for Programmable Instrumentation ANSVIEEE std 488 1 1987 contains detailed information on IEEE 488 operation Published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers Inc 345 East 47th Street New York New York 10017 a Chapter 2 HP BASIC Programming Examples includes programming examples in HP BASIC 1 2 HP IB Programming and Command Reference Analyzer Command Syntax Code Naming Convention The analyzer HP IB commands are derived from their front panel key titles where possible according to this naming convention Simple commands are the first four letters of the function they control as in POWE the command name for power If the function label contains two words the first three mnemonic letters are the first three letters of the first word and the fourth mnemonic letter is the first letter of the second word For example ELED is derived from electrical delay If there are many commands grouped together in a category as in markers or plotting pen numbers the command is increased to 8 letters The first 4 letters are the category label and the last 4 letters are the function specifier As an example category pen numbers are represented by the command PENN which
65. traces 1 19 data units 1 4 DATI 1 58 DC1 complete device clear 1 9 DEBU 1 58 debug 1 58 decrement loop counter 1 58 DECRLOOC 1 58 default calibration kits 1 56 default colors 1 58 DEFC 1 58 definitions of status bit 1 24 DEFLPRINT 1 59 DEFLTCPIO 1 49 1 59 DEFS D 1 59 DELA 1 59 delay 1 59 1 60 set to mkr 1 66 delete segment 1 74 DEL amp lt I gt 1 59 DELO 1 59 DELRFIXM 1 59 delta limits 1 64 delta reference 1 59 DEMOAMPL 1 59 demodulation off 1 59 DEMOOFF 1 59 DEMOPHAS 1 59 DeskJet 1 72 device clear 1 12 device clear DCI 1 9 device trigger 1 13 device types for HP IB 1 6 DFLT 1 59 directory size LIF 1 60 DIRS D 1 60 disabling the front panel 1 13 DISCUNTTID 1 60 DISCVOLU D 1 60 disk load file 1 65 disk drive address 1 55 disk drive unit 1 60 disk drive volume 1 60 disk file names 1 29 disk files HP IB commands 1 43 disk format 1 62 DISM 1 60 DISPDATA 1 60 DISPDATM 1 60 DISPDDM 1 60 DISPDMM 1 60 display A B 1 55 display A R 1 55 display B R 1 55 display data 1 60 display data mem 1 60 display data amp mem 1 60 display data mem 1 60 display data to mem 1 58 display format units 1 17 DISPLAY HP IB commands 1 36 display memory 1 60 DISPMEMO 1 60 DIVI 1 60 does not respond to parallel poll PPO 1 9 done with class 1 60 with isolation 1 63 DONE 1 60 index 3 done modify sequence 1 60 DONM 1 60 DOSEQ lt I
66. your analyzer The Quick Reference Guide provides a summary of selected user features The Programmer s Guide provides programming information including an HP IB command reference an HP IB programming reference as well as programming examples The System Verification and Test Guide provides the system verification and performance tests and the Performance Test Record for your HP 8752C network analyzer vii Contents 1 HP IB Programming and Command Reference Where to Look for More Information 0 4 Analyzer Command Syntax oao e TITS Code Naming Convention ao dE ee A Valid Characters bd a a poe ona E SE e wee ne eG Boa Units Sots he Bf Su skew inde St ei Zak ay oe AS a tly aes Whe ee ba Ge de Command Formats er th a bw RS ES AES RES General Structure a0 a a e a ed ty A dao me dos qa Syntax Types a a o Bee ee oe GR q UE es Cree oe a A HP IB Operation a oa E So eae ela HES EA SE avi Device Types a saua ETA EEN a Ge the rota Sa dE ns Talker 2 st dee EE A eee eS Listener 2 ARANA SS eh ee es Controler Ge coe a RE e eH Ee Bhi hd Sp rca o Ue hg HP IB Bus Structure O uh Se sta tae We ee RE aah oe ie Se a ae Data Bus tenon ee ta tone Y SZ oy RE eae La ee Handshake Lines cs O 4 BPE Control Lines cr apr Oe Soe we we ak E Be wisp in ts ads A Se HP IB Requirements i do c o ag na DE wa
67. 0 OUTPUT ONwa STAR Table I 1 MHZ Start frequency 410 OUTPUT ONwa STOP Table I 2 MHZ Stop frequency 420 OUTPUT Nwa POIN Table I 3 Number of points 430 OUTPUT ONwa SDON Segment done 440 NEXT I Next segment to send to the analyzer 450 460 OUTPUT QNwa EDITDONE Done with list 470 OUTPUT GNwa LISFREQ Set list frequency mode 480 490 OUTPUT O Nwa OPC 7 WAIT Wait for analyzer to finish 500 ENTER Nwa Reply Read the 1 when complete 510 LOCAL Nwa Release HP IB control 20 STOP End of main program 530 540 fa RoR Subroutines xao lodo a Of ok EE k kk 550 560 Loadpoin t Sub to read in each segment value 570 INPUT START FREQUENCY MHZ Table I 1 Read start frequency 580 INPUT STOP FREQUENCY MHZ Table I 2 Read stop frequency 590 INPUT NUMBER OF POINTS Table I 3 Read number of points in seg 600 IF Table I 3 1 THEN Table I 2 Table I 1 Single point same start stop 610 620 Print new segment into table on display 630 PRINT TABXY O I 1 1 TAB 10 Table I 1 TAB 25 640 PRINT Table I 2 TAB 40 Table 1 3 650 RETURN 660 END Running the Program Caution This example program will delete any existing limit lines before entering the new limits If this is not desired omit the line s that clear the existing limits in this case LINE 190 This program begins by presetting the analyzer The programmer will have to add the necessary command lin
68. 1 13 2 5 remote operation R 1 10 REN remote enable control line 1 7 report generation 2 64 reporting of errors 1 24 reporting on status 1 24 RESC 1 73 RESD 1 73 reset color 1 74 RESPDONE 1 74 response cal done 1 74 REST 1 74 restart averaging 1 55 restore display 1 73 resume cal sequence 1 73 RFLP 1 74 RIGL 1 74 RIGU 1 74 RL1 complete remote local capability 1 9 routing debugging 2 13 R remote operation 1 10 RSCO 1 74 RST 1 74 rules for code naming 1 3 S Sil 1 74 S21 1 74 SADD 1 74 SAV1 1 74 SAVC 1 74 save cal kit 1 74 save colors 1 78 save format 1 74 SAVE lt I gt 1 74 SAVE RECALL HP IB commands 1 43 SAVEREG lt I gt 1 74 save register 1 74 save sequence 1 78 SAVEUSEK 1 74 SAVUASCI 1 74 SAVUBINA 1 74 SCAL D 1 74 scale auto 1 55 SCALE REF HP IB commands 1 44 SCAP 1 74 SDEL 1 74 SDON 1 74 SEAL 1 75 SEAMAX 1 75 SEAMIN 1 75 SEAOFF 1 75 SEAR 1 75 SEATARG D 1 75 SEDI D 1 75 segment add 1 74 delete 1 74 edit 1 75 segment edit done 1 60 segment select 1 77 select first point D 1 75 select last point D 1 75 select point number D 1 75 select segment number D 1 75 select sequence 1 73 1 75 select standard 1 77 SELL D 1 49 SELMAXPT D 1 53 1 75 2 78 SELMINPT D 1 53 1 75 2 78 Index 11 SELPT D 1 53 1 75 2 78 SELSEG D 1 53 1 75 2 78 sensor input selection 1 80 SEQ HP IB commands 1 44 SEQ lt I gt 1 75
69. 1 18 FORMA 1 54 1 61 form 4 data transfer character string 1 16 FORM4 format 1 18 FORMS 1 54 1 61 FORMS format 1 18 format disk 1 62 format display units 1 17 FORMATDOS 1 62 FORMAT HP IB commands 1 37 FORMATLIF 1 62 formats for array data 1 17 formats for commands 1 4 formatted data 1 21 include with disk files 1 61 form feed plotter 1 71 printer 1 72 FREO 1 62 frequency notation 1 62 frequency related arrays 1 19 full acceptor handshake 4H1 1 9 full source handshake SH1 1 9 FULP 1 62 G GATE 1 62 GATECENTID 1 62 gate center time 1 62 gate on off 1 62 gate shape 1 62 maximum 1 62 minimum 1 62 normal 1 62 wide 1 62 GATESPAN D 1 62 gate span time 1 62 GATESTAR D 1 62 gate start time 1 62 GATESTOP D 1 62 gate stop time 1 62 GATSMAXI 1 62 GATSMINI 1 62 GATSNORM 1 62 GATSWIDE 1 62 general structure of syntax 1 4 GOSUB 1 62 gosub sequence 1 62 graticule color 1 70 group execute trigger response DT1 1 9 guidelines for code naming 1 3 H halting all modes and functions 1 12 handshake lines 1 7 HOLD 1 62 HP IB address capability 1 8 addresses 1 12 bus structure 1 6 1 7 command formats 1 4 data rate 1 8 device types 1 6 message transfer scheme 1 8 meta messages 1 12 multiple controller capability 1 8 operation 1 6 operational capabilities 1 9 requirements 1 8 status indicators 1 10 HP IB commands 1 1 HP IB only commands 1 49
70. 1 6 middle value segment 1 64 MINF D 1 67 MINMAX lt ON OFF gt 1 53 1 67 min max recording 1 67 modes analyzer bus 1 11 pass control 1 11 system controller 1 10 talker listener 1 11 modes for bus device 1 10 MODI1 1 67 modify cal kit 1 67 modify colors 1 58 modify sequence 1 67 multiple controller capability 1 8 N naming conventions 1 3 NEWSEQ lt I gt 1 67 new sequence 1 67 NEXP 1 67 next page 1 67 no extended talker capabilities TEO 1 9 NOOP 1 67 number of HP IB devices allowed 1 6 number of listeners allowed 1 6 NUMGID 1 67 O OFSD D 1 67 OFSL D 1 67 OFSZ D 1 68 OPC 1 49 1 68 OPC compatible commands 1 14 open capacitance values 1 56 OPEP 1 68 operating parameters 1 68 operational capabilities for HP IB 1 9 operation complete 1 14 operation of analyzer 1 14 operation of HP IB 1 6 OUTPACTI 1 51 OUTPAMAX 1 52 1 68 OUTPAMIN 1 52 1 68 OUTPCALC lt I gt 1 51 1 68 OUTPCALK 1 51 1 68 OUTPDAPT 1 53 OUTPDATA 1 51 1 68 OUTPDATF 1 51 1 68 OUTPDATP 1 68 OUTPDATR 1 53 1 68 OUTPERRO 1 51 1 68 OUTPFAIP 1 53 1 68 OUTPFORF 1 51 1 68 OUTPFORM 1 51 1 68 OUTPICAL lt I gt 1 51 1 69 OUTPIDEN 1 51 1 69 OUTPKEY 1 51 1 69 OUTPLEAS 1 51 1 69 OUTPLIMI 1 53 1 69 index OUTPLIM2 1 53 1 69 OUTPLIMF 1 51 1 69 OUTPLIML 1 51 1 69 OUTPLIMM 1 52 1 69 OUTPMARK 1 52 1 69 OUTPMEMF 1 52 1 69 OUTPMEMO 1 52 1 69 OUTPMST
71. 2 printer default setup 1 59 print monochrome 1 72 print sequence 1 72 print softkeys 1 72 PRIS 1 72 PRNTRAUTF 1 72 PRNTRFORF 1 72 PRNTYP540 1 72 PRNTYPDJ 1 72 PRNTYPEP 1 72 PRNTYPLJ 1 72 PRNTYPPJ 1 72 PRNTYPTJ 1 72 processing data chain 1 21 PSOFT 1 72 PSOFT lt ONI OFF gt 1 49 PTEXT 1 73 PTOS 1 73 purge file 1 73 PURG lt I gt 1 73 PWRLOSS 1 73 PWRR 1 73 Q Q lt I gt 1 73 query command 1 15 query syntax 1 5 queue for output 1 15 R RAID 1 73 RAIISOL 1 73 RAIRESP 1 73 raw data include with disk files 1 61 raw measured data 1 21 reading analyzer data 1 15 REAL 1 73 RECA lt I gt 1 73 recall colors 1 73 recall register 1 73 recall sequence 1 65 RECAREG lt I gt 1 73 RECO 1 73 reference line value 1 73 reference position 1 73 set to mkr 1 66 reflection 1 57 REFT 1 73 REFV D 1 73 remote enable REN control line 1 7 remote local capability RL1 1 9 remote mode 1 13 remote operation R 1 10 REN remote enable control line 1 7 index 9 reporting of errors 1 24 reporting on status 1 24 RESC 1 73 RESD 1 73 reset color 1 74 RESPDONE 1 74 response cal done 1 74 REST 1 74 restart averaging 1 55 restore display 1 73 resume cal sequence 1 73 RFLP 1 74 RIGL 1 74 RIGU 1 74 RL1 complete remote local capability 1 9 R remote operation 1 10 RSCO 1 74 RST 1 74 rules for code naming 1 3 S S11 1 74 S21 1 74 SADD 1 74
72. 32 HP IB Programming and Command Reference Select standard Sliding load Done with Table 1 8 Key Select Codes continued Action TO Mnemonic s 2 o Range CAL error correction calibration continued Standard A Standard B Standard C Standard D Standard E Class Isolation Response Resp and isol l port cal Select default kits 7 mm Modify kit Define std number begin std definition Define std type 3 5 mmC 3 5 mmD Type N 50 ohm Type N 75 ohm User defined Modify current Open Short Load Delay thru Arbitrary imped Open cap CO Open cap Cl Open cap C2 Open cap C3 Fixed load Sliding load Terminal imped RESP DONE RAID SAV1 CAL calibration kits CALK7MM CALK35MM CALK35MD CALKN50 CALKN75 CALK USED MODI1 DEFS D ane E e qu 10k 10715 F 10k 10727 F Hz 10k 1079 F H2 10k 10745 F Hz Oto 1kQ HP 1B Programming and Command Reference 1 33 Table 1 8 Key Select Codes continued Function Action mnemonie s 2 o Range CAL ealibration kits continued Define std offsets Delay OFSDID is OFSL D O to 1000 TQ s OFSZ D 0 1 to 5002 Std done Label std Specify class Class dene Label class Label kit Kit done Save kit Channel Min frequency Max frequency Coaxial Waveguide Standard defined Response Resp amp Isoi REL open RFL short RFL load Forward Trans R
73. 7 limit lines 2 58 setting up 2 58 limit line testing 2 52 list frequency table creating 2 52 list frequency table selecting a single segment 2 55 performing PASS FAIL tests 2 58 using list frequency mode 2 52 limit test table 2 58 creating 2 58 transmitting 2 58 list frequency mode 2 52 local lockout 2 5 local mode 2 5 M marker positioning 2 24 by data point location 2 24 by frequency location 2 24 by trace data value 2 24 measurement calibration example program 2 18 measurement data post processing 2 11 measurement data taking 2 11 measurement parameters required order 2 14 setting 2 14 verifying 2 16 measurement process 2 10 measurement setup 2 14 measurement specifications 2 28 group delay 2 28 magnitude 2 28 phase 2 28 memory requirements 2 1 MINMAX lt ON OFF gt 2 78 modes debug 2 13 O operation complete commands 2 7 OUTPAMAX 2 78 OUTPAMIN 2 78 OUTPDAPT 2 78 OUTPDATR 2 78 OUTPFAIP 2 78 OUTPLIMI 2 78 Index 2 OUTPLIM2 2 78 OUTPSEGAF 2 78 OUTPSEGAM 2 78 OUTPSEGF 2 78 OUTPSEGMID 2 78 OUTPSERN 2 78 Output Data Per Point 2 90 Output Data Per Range of Points 2 91 Output Limit Pass Fail by Channel 2 92 Output Limit Test Pass Fail Status Per Limit Segment 2 84 Output Minimum and Maximum Point For All Segments 2 88 Output Minimum and Maximum Point Per Limit Segment 2 87 Output Pass Fail Status for All Segments 2 85 P PASS FAIL test
74. 74 BR 1 55 bus device modes 1 10 bus structure 1 6 1 7 C C10 pass control capabilities 1 9 C1 C2 C3 system controller capabilities 1 9 C1 D 1 56 C2 D 1 56 index 1 C3 D 1 56 CALI 1 56 CALFCALF D 1 56 CALFFREQ D 1 56 CALFSENA 1 56 CALFSENB 1 56 CAL HP IB commands 1 32 calibration arrays 1 28 calibration coefficients 1 21 calibration command sequence 1 28 calibration kit HP IB commands 1 33 calibration kits 1 56 calibration kit string and learn string 1 23 calibration type off 1 56 CALIRAI 1 56 CALIRESP 1 56 CALIS111 1 56 CALK35MD 1 56 CALK35MM 1 56 CALK7MM 1 56 cal kit done 1 63 CALKNSO 1 56 CALKN75 1 56 CALKUSED 1 56 CALN 1 56 cal sensor table edit 1 56 Cal sequence begin 1 56 resume 1 73 CBRI D 1 56 CENT D 1 56 center 1 56 chain for data processing 1 21 CHANI 1 56 CHAN2 1 56 CHANNEL HP channels coupled 1 58 characters that are valid 1 4 CHOPAB 1 56 citifile save format 1 74 CLAD 1 56 CLASSHA 1 57 CLASS11B 1 57 CLASS11C 1 57 class done 1 56 CLEABIT D 1 57 CLEA lt I gt 1 57 CLEAL 1 57 CLEARALL 1 57 clear device 1 12 CLEAREG lt I gt 1 57 clear list 1 57 cstiunands 1 34 index 2 clear register 1 57 clear sequence 1 57 CLEASEQ lt I gt 1 57 CLEL 1 57 CLES 1 54 1 57 CLS 1 57 COAX 1 57 CO D 1 56 code naming conventions 1 3 code syntax structure 1 4 COLOCHID 1 58 COLOCHIM 1 58 COLOCH2D 1 58 CO
75. 9 output data by point 1 68 output data by range 1 68 output data command 1 15 Output Data Per Point 2 90 Output Data Per Range of Points 2 91 Output Limit Pass Fail by Channel 2 92 output limit test min max 1 70 Output Limit Test Pass Fail Status Per Limit Segment 2 84 output limit test status 1 70 output max values 1 68 Output Minimum and Maximum Point For All Segments 2 88 Output Minimum and Maximum Point Per Limit Segment 2 87 output min values 1 68 output number of failures 1 68 output of errors 1 27 Output Pass Fail Status for All Segments 2 85 gt output queue 1 15 output segment number 1 70 output syntax 1 15 outputting trace related data 1 16 P PaintJet 1 72 parallel poll configure 1 13 parallel poll non response PPO 1 9 PARAOUTI D 1 70 pass control 1 80 pass control capabilities C10 1 9 pass control mode 1 11 pass control mode 1 13 PASS FAIL tests 2 61 PAUS 1 70 pause 1 70 pause to select sequence 1 73 PCB D 1 70 PC graphics applications example program 2 71 PCOLDATA1 1 70 PCOLDATA2 1 70 PCOLGRAT 1 70 PCOLMEMO1 1 70 PCOLMEMO 1 70 PCOLTEXT 1 70 PCOLWARN 1 70 PDATA 1 70 PENNDATA D 1 70 PENNGRATID 1 70 PENNMARK D 1 70 PENNMEMOID 1 70 PENNTEXT D 1 71 pen number data 1 70 graticule 1 70 markers 1 70 memory 1 70 text 1 71 peripheral address 1 55 peripheral addresses 1 12 PGRAT 1 71 PHAO D 1 71 PHAS 1 71 phase 1 71 phase
76. A 1 52 1 69 OUTPMWID 1 52 1 69 OUTPMWIL 1 52 1 69 OUTPOPTS 1 69 OUTPPLOT 1 69 OUTPPRIN 1 69 OUTPPRNALL 1 52 1 70 OUTPRAF lt I gt 1 52 1 70 OUTPRAW1 1 70 OUTPRAW lt I gt 1 52 OUTPSEGAF 1 53 1 70 OUTPSEGAM 1 52 1 70 OUTPSEGF 1 53 1 70 OUTPSEGM 1 70 OUTPSEGMI D 1 52 OUTPSEQ lt I gt 1 51 1 70 OUTPSERN 1 51 1 70 OUTPSTAT 1 52 1 54 1 70 OUTPTITL 1 52 1 70 output plot string 1 69 output chl status 1 69 output ch2 status 1 69 output data by point 1 68 output data by range 1 68 output data command 1 15 output limit test min max 1 70 output limit test status 1 70 output max values 1 68 output min values 1 68 output number of failures 1 68 output of errors 1 27 output queue 1 15 output segment number 1 70 output syntax 1 15 outputting trace related data 1 16 P PaintJet 1 72 parallel poll configure 1 13 parallel poll non response PPO 1 9 PARAOUT D 1 70 pass control 1 80 pass control capabilities C10 1 9 pass control mode 1 11 pass control mode 1 13 PAUS 1 70 pause 1 70 index B pause to select sequence 1 73 PCB D 1 70 PCOLDATA1 1 70 PCOLDATA2 1 70 PCOLGRAT 1 70 PCOLMEMO1 1 70 PCOLMEMO2 1 70 PCOLTEXT 1 70 PCOLWARN 1 70 PDATA 1 70 PENNDATA D 1 70 PENNGRAT D 1 70 PENNMARKID 1 70 PENNMEMO D 1 70 PENNTEXTID 1 71 pen number data 1 70 graticule 1 70 markers 1 70 memory 1 70 text 1 71 peripheral address 1 55 per
77. AMP2B on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer The following example program performs a reflection 1 port measurement calibration using the HP 85032B 500 type N calibration kit The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence w An I O path is assigned for the analyzer a The system is initialized z The appropriate calibration kit is selected The softkey menu is deactivated m The reflection 1 port calibration sequence is run m The softkey menu is activated m The analyzer is released from remote control and the program ends The program is written as follows 10 This program performs a i port calibration on the HP 8752C 20 It guides the operator through a i port reflection calibration 30 using the HP 85032B 50 ohm type N calibration kit 40 50 The routine Waitforkey displays a message on the instrument s f 1 60 display and the console to prompt the operator to connect the i f i 3 70 calibration standard Once the standard is connected the 80 ENTER key on the computer keyboard is pressed to continue 90 100 EXAMP2B 110 120 ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 1 Assign an I O path for the analyzer 130 140 CLEAR SCREEN 150 Initialize the system 160 ABORT 7 t Generate an IFC Interface Clear 170 CLEAR ONwa SDC Selected Device Clear 180 190 OUTPUT Nwa CALKNSO t Select CAL kit type 200 OUTPUT Nwa RFLP t Select refle
78. C Interface Clear SDC Selected Device Clear analyzer Preset the analyzer and wait Read in the 1 returned Channel 1 Reflection measurement Log magnitude display Channel 2 Reflection measurement Phase display Dual channel display INPUT ENTER START FREQUENCY MHz F_start INPUT ENTER STOP FREQUENCY MHz F_stop 1 i Program the analyzer settings OUTPUT Nwa STAR F_start MHZ OUTPUT Nwa STOP F_stop MHZ i Autoscale the displays OUTPUT Nwa CHAN1 AUTO OUTPUT Nwa CHAN2 AUTO OUTPUT QNwa OPC WAIT ENTER CNwa Reply LOCAL ONwa END Running the Program The analyzer is initialized and the operator is queried for the measurement s start and stop frequencies The analyzer is setup to display the reflection measurement as a function of log magnitude and phase over the selected frequency range The displays are autoscaled and the program ends Set the start frequency Set the stop frequency Autoscale channel i display Autoscale channel 2 display Wait for the analyzer to finish Read the i when complete Release HP IB control HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 15 Example 1B Verifying Parameters Note This program is stored as EXAMPIB on the HP 87520 Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer This example shows how to read analyzer settings into your program Chapter 1 HP IB Programming and Command Reference contains additional information on the
79. CID 1 55 address controller 1 55 disk drive 1 55 peripheral 1 55 plotter 1 55 power meter 1 55 printer 1 55 address capability 1 8 addresses for HP IB 1 12 ADDRPERI D 1 55 ADDRPLOT D 1 55 ADDRPOWMID 1 55 ADDRPRIN D 1 55 adjust brightness 1 56 adjust color 1 58 adjust tint 1 78 AH1 full acceptor handshake 1 9 ALTAB 1 55 alternate inputs 1 55 ANAB 1 55 ANAI 1 55 analog bus 1 55 analog input 1 55 analyzer array data formats 1 18 analyzer bus mode 1 11 analyzer command syntax 1 3 analyzer control of peripherals 1 11 analyzer data reading 1 15 analyzer identification 1 15 analyzer operation 1 14 analyzer single bus concept 1 10 analyzer status reporting structure 1 24 appendage in syntax 1 4 AR 1 55 array data formats 1 17 arrays of data 1 21 arrays related to frequency 1 19 ASCH save format 1 74 ASEG 1 55 assert sequence 1 55 ASSS 1 55 ATN attention control line 1 7 attention ATN control line 1 7 AUTO 1 55 auto feed plotter 1 71 printer 1 72 auto scale 1 55 averaging 1 55 restart 1 55 averaging factor 1 55 AVERFACTID 1 55 AVERO 1 55 AVERREST 1 55 AVG HP IB commands 1 32 B BACI D 1 55 background intensity 1 55 BANDPASS 1 55 basic talker T6 1 9 beep emit 1 60 BEEPDONE 1 55 beeper on done 1 55 beeper on warning 1 55 BEEPFAIL 1 55 BEEPWARN 1 55 begin cal sequence 1 56 bi directional lines 1 7 binary save format 1
80. DSEQ lt I gt ito 6 For log mag 500 dB For phase 500 degrees For Smith chart and Polar 500 units For linear magnitude 500 units For SWR 500 units The scale is always positive and has minimum values of 001 dB 10e 12 degrees 10e 15 seconds and 10 picounits Requires pass control when using the HP 1B port 1 44 HP IB Programming and Command Reference Table 1 8 Key Select Codes continued SEQ sequencing continued Special Peripheral address ADDRPERI D D functions Title to peripherai TITTPERI Wait D seconds SEQWAITID D 0 1 to 3000 s PAUS MARKCW EMIB TITTPRIN TITTPMTR Pause Marker to CW freq Emit beep Title to printer E pa peo Ae GO 4 to Title to power meter HP IB Show menus Assert seq status bit Read pwr mtr HP IB into title string Send number into SHOM 1 ASSS 1 PMTRTTIT 1 TITTMEM 1 trace memory Duplicate seq X DUPLSEQ lt X gt SEQ lt Y gt 2 to seq Y PRINSEQ lt I gt TITSQ TITSEQ lt I gt CLEASEQ lt I gt Print sequence I Begin title sequence Title sequence I No Dm y Clear sequence 1 IFLTPASSSEQ lt I gt 2 Decision making If limit test pass i then do sequence If limit test fail then do sequence IPLTFAILSEQ lt I gt 2 Set value LOOCID 8 INCRLOOC DECRLOOC IFLCEQZESEQ lt I gt 2 Loop counter 0 to 32 760
81. EGF and gear es commands to report on D can range from 1 to 18 Selects the last point number in the range of points that the OUTPDATR command will report D can range from 0 to the number of points minus Selects the first point number in the range of points that the OUTPDATR command will report D can range from 0 to the number of points minus 1 Selects point number that the OUTPDATR command will report D can range from 0 to the number of points minus 1 Refer to the Limit Line and Data Point Special Functions section in Chapter 2 Values returned for limit test status are 1 PASS O FAIL 1 NO_LIMIT t For the definition of a limit segment see Example Display of Limit Lines in the Chapter 2 section titled Limit Line and Data Point Special Functions HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 53 Table 1 9 HP IB Only Commands continued SOFT WRSK lt 1 TO 8 gt CLES ESB ESR OUTPSTAT ESEID ESNB D SRE D 1 54 HP IB Programming and Command Reference OUTPUT FORMATS HP 8752 internal format with header 82 bit floating point with header 64 bit floating point with header ASCH format No header 32 bit PC format bytes reversed Activates softkey I 1 to 8 Writes label 10 char to indicated softkey Clears the status byte Returns event status register B Returns the event status register Returns the status byte Enabies event status register 0 l
82. ERAS In DOS format the filename is FILTER XX The first appended character is the file type telling the kind of information in the file The second appended character is a data index used to distinguish files of the same type Data and calibration files are form 3 data without a header which can be read off the disk The other files are not meant to be decoded Table 1 7 lists the appended characters and their meanings Table 1 7 Disk File Names s l i I Instrument state G Graphics 1 Display graphics D Error corrected data 1 Channel 1 2 Channel 2 R Raw data ito 4 Channel 1 raw arrays i to 4 5 to 8 Channel 2 raw arrays 1 to 4 F Formatted data 1 Channel 1 2 Channel 2 M Memory trace al Channel 1 2 Channel 2 P Instrument state appendix Cc Cal kit K 1 Cal data channel 1 Stimulus state ito 9 Coefficients 1 to 9 A Coefficient 10 B Coefficient 11 0 Coefficient 12 2 Cal data channel 2 Oto C Same as channel 1 F Full page HP GL plot P L Left HP GL plot L Lower U Upper R Right HP GL plot L Lower U Upper HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 29 Using Key Codes 60 ACTIVE CHANNEL te 52 12 ei O EJ 45 5 21 RESPONSE 53 5 48 8 8 51 56 OW ojoja 3 0 0008 fo 19 35 SE 9008 59 4 STIMULUS rr S SATEN 571 HS 9 5811150 2 i PR pes 10 chble Figure 1 6 Key Codes Note 1 Key code 63 is invalid key Note 2 OUTPKEY reports a
83. G INCRLOOC INID INIE Selects the imaginary display format Increments the sequencing loop counter by 1 NEWSEQ lt I gt must precede to ensure that a sequence is currently being created or modified Initializes the external disk All information on the disk will be destroyed Requires pass control Same as INID These commands input individual calibration coefficient arrays Before sending the array issue a CALIXXXX command where XXX specifies the calibration type of the data Then input the cal arrays Lastly store the data with SAVC The instrument goes into hold displaying uncorrected data SING completes the process by displaying error corrected data See Table 1 6 for the contents of the different arrays INPUCALCO1 D INPUCALCO2 D INPUCALCOS D INPUCALK D INPUDATA D INPUFORM D INPULEAS D INPURAW1 D INTE D INTM ISOD KEY D KITD KOR Array 1 Array 2 Array 3 Inputs a cal kit read out with OUTCALK After the transfer the data should be saved into the user cal kit area with SAVEUSEK Inputs an error corrected data array using current format The instrument stops sweeping and then formats and displays the data Inputs a formatted data array using the current format The instrument stops sweeping and displays the data Inputs a learn string read out by QUTPLEAS Inputs a raw data array using the current format See OUTPRAW for the meaning of the array The instrument stops
84. H2 Seg2 HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 81 Output Results Table 2 6 shows the output of the OUTPSEGAM test min max of all active segments note that the segments with asterisks from Table 2 5 have no output in Table 2 6 Table 2 6 Example Output OUTPSEGAM min max of all segments Minimum Value Hz Value dB Maximum Value Hz Value dB 330028350 ps mmo oosasssa 1680021600 3000015000 Eo ae VENA Es 1110024450 0 2364199 1110024450 0 2364199 3960010200 2 745585 2640016800 0 888033 5790001050 4 136458 5010004950 1 064739 5820000900 4 472594 6000000000 3 501008 2 82 HP BASIC Programming Examples Constants Used Throughout This Document Note The logic values attached to pass and fail indicators were chosen to be consistent with the current logic used in the standard OUTPLIML and OUTPLIMF commands Table 2 7 Pass Fail No_Limit Status Constants FAIL Table 2 7 is an interpretation of the Pass Fail No_Limit status constants These constants are used to identify the Pass Fail No_Limit state on the data strings if status is returned Table 2 8 Min Max Test Constants Table 2 8 is an interpretation of the min max test constants If the selected segment has no associated limit the NO_DATA string is generated which reports a stimulus value of 0 and a data value of 1000 E HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 83 Output Limit Test Pass Fail Status Per Limit Segmen
85. I lt I gt 1 31 identification of analyzer 1 15 of firmware revision 1 15 IDN 1 15 1 49 1 62 IEEE 488 universal commands 1 12 IEEE standard codes formats protocols information 1 2 IEEE standard digital interface information 1 2 IF bandwidth 1 62 IFBIHIGH 1 62 IFBILOW 1 62 IFBW D 1 62 IFC abort message 1 12 IFC interface clear control line 1 7 IFLCEQZESEQ lt I gt 1 62 IFLCNEZESEQ lt I gt 1 62 IFLTFAILSEQ lt I gt 1 62 IFLTPASSSEQ lt I gt 1 62 IMAG 1 62 imaginary 1 62 increment loop counter 1 63 INCRLOOC 1 63 INID 1 63 INIE 1 63 INPUCALC lt I gt 1 50 INPUCALC lt I gt D 1 63 INPUCALK D 1 50 1 63 INPUDATA D 1 50 1 63 INPUFORM D 1 50 1 63 INPULEAS D 1 50 1 63 INPURAW lt I gt 1 63 INPURAW lt I gt D 1 50 instrument state summary 1 23 INTE D 1 63 intensity background 1 55 interface addresses 1 12 interface clear IFC control line 1 7 interface functions controller 1 6 listener 1 6 talker 1 6 interpolative correction 1 58 INTM 1 63 ISOD 1 63 K key codes 1 30 KEY D 1 49 1 63 key select codes 1 31 KITD 1 63 kit done 1 68 KOR 1 49 L LABEFWDTI 1 64 label cal kit 1 64 label class 1 64 label standard 1 64 LABERESI 1 64 LABERESP 1 64 LABES11A 1 64 LABESI1B 8 1 64 LABES11C 1 64 LABK 1 64 LABS 1 64 LaserJet 1 72 LEO no extended listener capabilities 1 9 index 5 learn string and calibratio
86. IM MENUSYST RR Cs t d 1 50 HPAB Programming and Command Reference Accepts error corrected data Accepts formatted data Accepts raw data Accepts the individual error coefficient arrays Issue the command that begins the calibration the coefficients are from e g CALIS115 then input the data Finally issue SAVC and trigger a sweep Accepts a cal kit Accepts the learn string Preceded by SELL if learn string is not current revision Turning power trip off clears a power trip after an overload condition is detected at one of the input ports Table 1 9 HP IB Only Commands continued Deseription OUTPUT Outputs value of function in active entry area in ASCII format Active function Serial number OUTPSERN Outputs the serial number of the analyzer Error coefficient OUTPCALC lt 01 02 03 gt Outputs the selected error coefficient array from the active channel Each array is the same as a data array See Table 1 6 for the contents of the arrays Interp cal OUTPICAL lt 01 02103 gt Outputs the selected interpolated cal coefficient array Cal kit OUTPCALK Outputs the active cal kit a less than 1000 byte string in form 1 Data OUTPDATA Outputs the error corrected data from the active channel in real imaginary pairs See Figure 1 4 OUTPDATF Fast data transfer command for OUTPDATA OUTPERRO Outputs the oldest error in th
87. ING 10A 154A 15A 20A SEGMENT START MHZ STOP MHZ NUMBER OF HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 55 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 540 550 560 570 580 590 600 610 620 630 640 650 660 670 680 2 56 POINTS OUTPUT CNwa EDITLIST OUTPUT ONwa SEDI30 OUTPUT ONwa SEDI ENTER QNwa Numsegs Setup table and read segments from analyzer ALLOCATE Table 1 Numsegs 1 3 Allocate table of segments FOR I 1 TO Numsegs Cycle through segments t t Edit list frequency segment Set largest segment number Request number of highest segment Read number of actual segments sm em rem pam GOSUB Readlist Read in segment definitions NEXT 1 Next segment Loop and read segment to be activated LOOP Request operator to enter segment INPUT SELECT SEGMENT NUMBER O TO EXIT Segment EXIT IF Segment 0 Exit point OUTPUT ONwa EDITDONE SSEG Segment Set active segment to sweep END LOOP End activation loop OUTPUT ONwa ASEG Set all segment sweep DISP PROGRAM ENDED i OUTPUT Nwa OPC WAIT ENTER Nwa Reply LOCAL Nwa STOP t E aaao okoo okok kkk Subroutines ROKR a A o k k k k 1 Readlist OUTPUT Nwa EDITLIST OUTPUT Nwa SEDI I OUTPUT Nwa STAR Send start freq to display value OUTPU
88. IT and press RETURN Type in the following program 10 OUTPUT 716 SWET 3 S 0PC SING Set the sweep time to 3 seconds and OPC a single sweep 20 DISP SWEEPING 30 ENTER 716 Reply The program will halt at this point until the analyzer completes the sweep and issues a one 1 40 DISP DONE 50 END Running the Program Running this program causes the computer to display the sweeping message as the instrument executes the sweep The computer will display DONE just as the instrument goes into hold When DONE appears the program could then continue on being assured that there is a valid data trace in the instrument Preparing for Remote HP IB Control At the beginning of a program the analyzer is taken from an unknown state and brought under remote control This is done with an abort clear sequence ABORT 7 is used to halt bus activity and return control to the computer CLEAR 716 will then prepare the analyzer to receive commands by e clearing syntax errors clearing the input command buffer m clearing any messages waiting to be output The abort clear sequence readies the analyzer to receive HP IB commands The next step involves programming a known state into the analyzer The most convenient way to do this is to preset the analyzer by sending the PRES preset command If preset cannot be used the status reporting mechanism may be employed When using the status reporting register CLES Clear Status can be transmitted t
89. LOCH2M 1 58 COLOGRAT 1 58 color data channel 1 1 70 data channel 2 1 70 graticule 1 70 memory channel 1 1 70 memory channel 2 1 70 text 1 70 warning 1 70 COLOR D 1 58 colors 1 70 COLOTEXT 1 58 COLOWARN 1 58 command 1 15 command formats 1 4 command query 1 15 commands HP IB 1 1 command syntax 1 3 command syntax structure 1 4 complete operation 1 14 complete service request capabilities SR1 1 9 computer controllers 1 6 CONS 1 58 CONT 1 58 continue sequence 1 58 controller address 1 55 controller interface function 1 6 control lines 1 7 CONVIDS 1 58 conventions for code naming 1 3 CONVOFF 1 58 CONVREF 1 58 CONVYTRA 1 58 CONVZTRA 1 58 copy display 1 69 1 71 1 72 COPYFRFT 1 58 COPYFRRT 1 58 COPY HP IB commands 1 35 CORI 1 58 CORR 1 58 correction 1 58 interpolative 1 58 COUC 1 58 COUP 1 58 coupled channels 1 58 CRT focus 1 61 CRT intensity 1 63 CRT title 1 79 CW freq 1 58 CWFREQ D 1 58 CW time 1 58 CWTIME 1 58 D D 1 31 DIDIVD2 1 58 data include with disk files 1 61 data array formats 1 17 data arrays 1 21 data bus 1 7 data channel 1 color 1 70 data channel 2 color 1 70 data for markers 1 16 data levels 1 22 data only include with disk files 1 61 data processing chain 1 21 data rate 1 8 data reading 1 15 data transfer 1 7 data transfer character definitions 1 16 Data Transfer Commands Fast 1 22 data transfer for
90. MIN PT VALUE MAX PT STIMULUS MAX PT VALUE E ae M ee aS 1 o sem GHz 2 12 o orem 2 ae Table 2 10 is an interpretation of the min max data returned using the SELSEG N and OUTPSEGM commands Note A new Line Feed character LF is inserted after the segment number and after each data pair HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 87 Output Minimum and Maximum Point For All Segments Three HP IB commands allow the user to dump the min or max or min and max values for all active segments E OUTPSEGAM outputs min and max data for each active segment m OUTPAMIN outputs the min data for each active segment m OUTPAMAX outputs the max data for each active segment The OUTPSEGAM output consists of s The total number of segments being reported z The following data for each segment o segment number o min stimulus o min value O max stimulus o max value Example Sending OUTPSEGAM may return the following 5 1 1 900000000E 09 9 900000E 01 2 123456789E 09 2 123456E 00 3 2 300000000E 09 10 00000E 01 2 600000000E 09 3 100000E 00 5 3 200000000E 09 10 00000E 01 3 400000000E 09 3 100000E 00 7 4 300000000E 09 10 00000E 01 4 700000000E 09 3 100000E 00 8 5 000000000E 09 10 00000E 01 5 400000000E 09 3 100000E 00 For an explanation of these results see table Table 2 11 Note A new Line Feed character LF is inserted after the segment number and after ea
91. O 9 00 O 00 20 OS This program stores a file in the same manner as an operator would store a file onto the analyzer s external disk drive from the front panel If a PC is being used as the system controller the disk format will have to be transformed from LIF to PC DOS format A file utility is available to perform this format translation The utility is called LIF2DOS EXE This utility is available on the HP BASIC Programming Examples disk HP part number 08752 10004 that was received with the analyzer Once transformed the PC will now have a DOS format file to read and interpret 2 72 HP BASIC Programming Examples This example explains the process of storing the data from the analyzer to a file on the external disk drive There is also a program to read the data from the file into a data array for further processing or reformatting to another file type For the example the assumption has been made that the format transformation has already taken place and there is a file that can be read record by record from which data can be retrieved The goal of this example is to recover an array of stimulus frequency along with the trace data values CITIFILES contain the real and imaginary values of each data point Some further transformation will be required to obtain magnitude values for example The disk file contents for this example are shown above This file contains more information than will be used in this example The file
92. PRAN5 PRANG PRAN7 PWRR lt PAUTO PMAN gt SOUP lt ON OFF gt SWETID SWEA REST HOLD SING NUMG D CONT EXTTOFF EXTTON EXTTPOIN MANTRIG POIN D COUC lt ON OFF gt CWFREQID SLOPE D SLOPO lt ON OFF gt 1 40 HPAB Programming and Command Reference DO BDY h geo et eet PY CO H oe op op ee ad OPC OPC OPC OPC OPC OPC t For frequency sweeps 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 800 kHz to 3 GHz for Option 003 and 30 kHz to 6 GHz for Option 006 For power sweeps 15 to 20 dBm in range 0 25 dB maximum in other ranges For CW time 0 to 24 hours For frequency sweep transform on 1 frequency step For CW time sweep transform on 1 time step 22 to 15 dBmt 0 01 to 86 400 s 1 to 999 OPC 3 11 26 51 101 201 401 801 1601 Stimulus range 2 to 2 dB GHz 7 Function Sweep type Edit segment Table 1 8 Key Select Codes continued MENU stimulus continued Select a segment Select ali segments Power CW time Begin Add segment Edit segment N Done with segment Delete segment Done Clear list Start Stop Center LINFREQ LOGFREQ LISFREQ SSEGID ASEG POWS CWTIME EDITLIST SADD SEDI D SDON SDEL EDITDONE CLEL STARID STOP D CENTID SPANID POIN D STPSIZE D CWFREQID s o Range Stimulus ranget Stimulus range Stimulus ranget Stimulus range 1 to 1632 Stimulus range Stimulus range Select active Marker zero Delt
93. Programmer s Guide HP 87 920 Network Analyzer CA prcuano HP Part No 08752 90137 Supersedes August 1994 Printed in USA July 1997 Notice The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this material including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard shall not be liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this material Copyright Hewlett Packard Company 1991 1992 1993 1994 1997 All Rights Reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation without prior written permission is prohibited except as allowed under the copyright laws 1212 Valley House Drive Rohnert Park CA 94928 4999 USA Warranty This Hewlett Packard instrument product is warranted against defects in material and workmanship for a period of one year from date of shipment During the warranty period Hewlett Packard Company will at its option either repair or replace products which prove to be defective For warranty service or repair this product must be returned to a service facility designated by Hewlett Packard Buyer shall prepay shipping charges to Hewlett Packard and Hewlett Packard shall pay shipping charges to return the product to Buyer However Buyer shall pay all shipping charges duti
94. Selects full page plotting as opposed to plotting in one of the four quadrants These commands control the time domain gate available only with Option 010 time domain GATECENT D Center time GATEO lt ON OFF gt Gate ON OFF OPC compatible GATESPANI D Span time GATESTAR D Start time GATESTOP D Stop time These commands set the gate shape GATSMAXI Maximum GATSMINI Minimum GATSNORM Normal GATSWIDE Wide GOSUB Invokes a sequence as a subroutine Used with SEQ lt I gt HOLD Puts the sweep trigger into hold IDN Outputs the identification string HEWLETT PACKARD 8752C 0 X XX where X XX is the firmware revision of the instrument IFBIHIGH Tests the input test set I O interconnect bit Invokes the sequence specified by SEQ lt I gt if the TTL input bit is high IFBILOW Tests the input test set I O interconnect bit Invokes the sequence specified by SEQ lt I gt if the TTL input bit is low IFBW D Sets the IF bandwidth These commands branch an executing sequence to a new sequence if the following condition is satisfied NEWSEQ lt I gt must precede to ensure that a sequence is currently being created or modified IFLCEQZESEQ lt I gt If loop counter equals zero then do sequence lt I gt IFLCNEZESEQ lt I gt If loop counter does not equal zero then do sequence lt I gt IFLTFAILSEQ lt I gt Limit test fails IFLTPASSSEQ lt I gt Limit test passes 1 62 HP IB Programming and Command Reference IMA
95. Singie point type On off Low pass Low pass impulse Low pass step Bandpass Specify gate menu Maximum Normal Minimum Any value Use trace memory OF Amplitude Phase t For frequency sweeps 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 300 kHz to 3 GHz for Option 003 and 30 kHz to 6 GHz for Option 006 For power sweeps 15 to 20 dBm in range 0 25 dB maximum in other ranges For CW time 0 to 24 hours For frequency sweep transform on 1 frequency step For CW time sweep transform on 1 1 time step For log mag 500 dB For phase 500 degrees For Smith chart and Polar 500 units For linear magnitude 500 units For SWR 500 units The scale is always positive and has minimum values of 001 dB 10e 12 degrees 10e 15 seconds and 10 picounits _Mnemonic s gt _o Range EDITLIML SADD SEDI D SDON SDEL EDITDONE CLEAL LIMS D Stimulus range MARKSTIM LIMU D LIML D LIMD D LIMM D MARK MIDD LIMTFL LIMTSL LIMTSP Amplitude range Amplitude range Amplitude range Amplitude range ort fd qual pod CO CO CO GO mc TIMDTRAN lt ON OFF gt SETF LOWPIMPU LOWPSTEP BANDPASS SPEG WINDMAXI WINDNORM WINDMINI WINDOWID State dependent WINDUSEM lt ON OFF gt DEMOOFF DEMOAMPL DEMOPHAS HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 47 Table 1 8 Key Selec
96. T Nwa OUTPACTI Output active function value ENTER Nwa Table I 1 Read start frequency i y Wait for analyzer to finish Read the 1 when complete Release HP IB control End of main program em vee omm s Read segment list from analyzer Edit segment list Select segment to edit OUTPUT Nwa STOP Send stop freq to display value OUTPUT Nwa OUTPACTI Output active function value ENTER Nwa Table I 2 Read stop frequency OUTPUT Nwa POIN Send number of points to display OUTPUT Nwa OQUTPACTI Dutput active function value ENTER Nwa Table I 3 Read number of points t IF 1 18 THEN Pause if more than 17 segments INPUT PRESS RETURN FOR MORE A Read Return to continue END IF Print new header for segment data IMAGE 4D 6X 4D 6D 3X 4D 6D 3X 4D Format image to disp segment data PRINT USING 640 I Table I 1 1 E 6 Table I 2 1 E 6 Table I 3 RETURN t END HP BASIC Programming Examples Running the Program The program will read the parameters for each list frequency segment from the analyzer and build a table containing all the segments The parameters of each segment will be printed on the computer screen If there are more than 17 segments the program will pause Press to see more segments The maximum number of segments that can be read is 30 the maximum number of segments the analyzer can hold Use the computer s and keys to scroll through the list of segments if there are more than 17
97. T ONwa MARK1 10 E 6 590 600 OUTPUT ONwa OPC WAIT 610 ENTER Nwa Reply 620 LOCAL Nwa 630 PRINT 640 PRINT Position marker and observe frequency point spacing 650 660 END Running the Program Run the program Observe the controller display The corresponding frequency values are shown with the trace data values Position the marker and observe the relationship between the frequency values and the point spacing on the trace Compare the trace data values on the analyzer with those shown on the controller display 2 34 HP BASIC Programming Examples Example 3E Data Transfer Using FORM 1 Internal Binary Format Note This program is stored as EXAMP3E on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer FORM 1 is used for rapid I O transfer of analyzer data It contains the least number of bytes per trace and does not require re formatting in the analyzer This format is more difficult to convert into a numeric array in the controller Analyzer state information such as learn strings and calibration arrays may be easily transferred in this format because data conversion is not required Recalling an instrument state that has been stored in a file and transferring instrument state information to the analyzer are excellent applications of a FORM 1 data transfer The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence m An I O path is assigned for the analyzer u The system is
98. TJ PRNTYP540 PRNTYPDJ PRNTYPLJ PRNTYPPJ PRNTYPEP PLIPRTHPIB PLIPRTDISK MEAS 1 38 HP IB Programming and Command Reference h pe Ee ei oe oe opt o p 0 to 30 0 to 30 0 to 30 0 to 30 O to 30 Oto 30 Oto 30 On 436A Off 438A 437B ay Table 1 8 Key Select Codes continued action O Mmemomie s 2 o name MEAS continued CONVOFF CONVZREF CONVZTRA CONVYREF CONVYTRA CONVIDS Off Z refiection Conversion to alternate Z transmission Y reflection Y transmission 1 S parameters Auxiliary input ANAI D Analog input Syntax type 1 when ANABOFF Syntax type 3 and range 1 to 31 when ANABON HP 1B Programming and Command Reference 1 39 Power Time Measurement Trigger Points Coupled channels CW freq Power slope 1_85 to 20 dBm for Option 004 Table 1 8 Key Select Codes continued Function action mMmemomie s o Range Level Always couple power Range 6 Range 1 Range 2 Range 3 Range 4 Range 5 Range 6 Range 7 Power range auto manual Source power on off Specify Selects fastest sweep time Restart Hold Single Number of groups Continuous External trigger off External trigger on sweep External trigger on point Manual trigger on point Specify On off Set value Value On off POWE D COUP lt ONIOFF gt PRANO PRANI PRAN2 PRANS PRAN4
99. TPUT ONwa FORM1 Select internal binary format 240 OUTPUT QNwa OUTPDATA Qutput error corrected data 250 260 Read in the data header two characters and two bytes for length 270 1 2h 280 no early termination terminate when ENTER is complete 290 2A read two chars 300 310 ENTER Nwa_bin USING 2A Header Read header as 2 byte string 320 ENTER Nwa_bin Length Read length as 2 byte integer 330 PRINT Header Header Array length Length 340 350 ALLOCATE Data Length String buffer for data bytes 360 K format statement 370 EOI as a terminator LF is suppressed and read as data 380 K All characters are read and not interpreted LF is included 390 ENTER Nwa_bin USING K Data Read trace into string array 400 410 PRINT Number of bytes received LEN Data 420 1 430 OUTPUT QNwa CONT Restore continuous sweep 440 OUTPUT Nwa OPC WAIT Wait for the analyzer to finish 450 ENTER Nwa Reply Read the 1 when complete 460 470 LOCAL Nwa Release HP IB control 480 END Running the Program The analyzer is initialized The header and the number of bytes in the block transfer are printed on the controller display Once the transfer is complete the number of bytes in the data string is printed Compare the two numbers to be sure that the transfer was completed 2 36 HP BASIC Programming Examples Example 4 Measurement Process Synchronization Status Reporting SRQ i
100. UON Turn on the softkey menu 380 390 OUTPUT Nwa 0PC WAIT Wait for the analyzer to finish 400 ENTER ONwa Reply Read the 1 when complete 410 LOCAL Nwa Release HP IB control 420 430 END 440 ADO coo RR Subroutines SM ne ok o ok ae a ER jojo k kkk k k ae e e e k 460 470 Waitforkey Prompt routine to read a keypress on the controller 480 SUB Waitforkey Lab 490 Position and display text on the analyzer display 500 OUTPUT 717 PG PU PA390 3700 PD LB Lab PRESS ENTER WHEN READYA 510 520 DISP Lab amp Press ENTER when ready Display prompt on console 530 INPUT A i Read ENTER key press 540 550 OUTPUT 717 PG 1 Clear analyzer display 560 SUBEND Running the Program Note This program does not modify the instrument state in any way Before running the program set up the desired instrument state Run the program and connect the standards as prompted When a standard is connected press the on the controller keyboard to measure it The program assumes that the port being calibrated is a 500 type N female test port The prompts appear just above the message line on the analyzer display Pressing on the controller keyboard continues the program and measures the standard The program will display a message when the measurement calibration is complete 2 20 HP BASIC Programming Examples Example 2B Reflection 1 Port Measurement Calibration Note This program is stored as EX
101. a reference Fixed mkr position 1to5 All off Zero offsets lto5 Fixed marker Mode off Stimulus Value Aux value MARK lt I gt D MARKOFF MARKZERO DELR lt I gt DELRFIAM DELO MARKFSTI D MARKF VALID MARKFAUVID Stimulus range Stimulus range Amplitude range Amplitude range For frequency sweeps 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 300 kHz to 3 GHz for Option 003 and 30 kHz to 6 GHz for Option 006 For power sweeps 15 to 20 dBm in range 0 25 dB maximum in other ranges For CW time 0 to 24 hours For frequency sweep transform on 1 frequency step For CW time sweep transform on 1 time step For log mag 500 dB For phase 500 degrees For Smith chart and Polar 500 units For linear magnitude 500 units For SWR 500 units The scale is always positive and has minimum values of 001 dB 10e 12 degrees 10e 15 seconds and 10 picounits HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 41 Table 1 8 Key Select Codes continued Function action Mmemonic s 2 o Range Marker placement Continuous MARKCONT 1 MARK DISC Discrete MARKCOUP MARK UNCO 1 Couple channels Coupled Uncouple On off Displayed DISM lt ON OFF gt 2 POLMLOG POLMLIN POLMRI Polar markers SMIMLIN SMIMLOG SMIMRI SMIMRX SMIMGB Smith markers Rh Ra pa MARKSTAR MARKSTOP MARKCENT MARKSPAN MARKREF MARKDELA Set function t
102. ages to using the single sweep mode 1 The user can initiate the sweep 2 The user can determine when the sweep has completed 3 The user can be confident that the trace data has be derived from a valid sweep Execute the command string OPC SING to place the analyzer in single sweep mode and trigger a sweep Once the sweep is complete the analyzer returns an ASCII character one 1 to indicate the completion of the sweep Note The measurement cycle and the data acquisition cycle must always be synchronized The analyzer must complete a measurement sweep for the data to be valid HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 13 Example 1 Measurement Setup The programs included in Example 1 provide the user the option to perform instrument setup functions for the analyzer from a remote controller Example 1A is a program designed to setup the analyzer s measurement parameters Example 1B is a program designed to verify the measurement parameters Example 1A Setting Parameters Note This program is stored as EXAMPIA on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer In general the procedure for setting up measurements on the network analyzer via HP IB follows the same sequence as if the setup was performed manually There is no required order as long as the desired frequency range number of points and power level are set prior to performing the calibration first and the measurement second The
103. alyzer parameters 170 OUTPUT Nwa POIN Read in the default trace length 180 ENTER CNwa Num points 190 PRINT Number of points Num_points 200 PRINT 210 2 220 OUTPUT Nwa STAR 230 ENTER Nwa Start_f 240 PRINT Start Frequency Start_f 250 PRINT 260 270 OUTPUT CNwa AVERO 280 ENTER Nwa Flag uu Read in the start frequency aa Averaging on 2 16 HP BASIC Programming Examples 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 PRINT Flag Flag IF Flag i THEN PRINT Averaging ON ELSE PRINT Averaging OFF END IF t OUTPUT Nwa OPC WAIT ENTER ONwa Reply LOCAL Nwa END Running the Program Test flag and print analyzer state Wait for the analyzer to finish Read the 1 when complete Release HP IB control The analyzer is preset The preset values are returned and printed out for the number of points the start frequency and the state of the averaging function The analyzer is released from remote control and the program ends HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 17 Example 2 Measurement Calibration This section shows you how to coordinate a measurement calibration over HP IB You can use the following sequence for performing either a manual measurement calibration or a remote measurement calibration via HP IB 1 Select the calibration type 2 Measure the calibration standards 3 Declare the calibration done The actual sequence depends
104. am performs a response calibration on the HP 8752c 20 It guides the operator through the response calibration by 30 connecting a thru connection between the test ports 40 50 The routine Waitforkey displays a message on the instrument s f 60 display and the console to prompt the operator to connect the 1 1 i 70 calibration standard Once the standard is connected the 80 ENTER key on the computer keyboard is pressed to continue 90 100 EXAMP2A 110 120 ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 Assign an 1 0 path for the analyzer 130 140 CLEAR SCREEN 150 Initialize the system 160 ABORT 7 Generate an IFC Interface Clear 170 CLEAR QNva t SDC Selected Device Clear 180 190 OUTPUT Nwa TRAP t Select transmission measurement 200 OUTPUT QNwa CALKNSO Select CAL kit type 210 OUTPUT Nwa MENUOFF Turn softkey menu off 220 230 OUTPUT Nwa CALIRESP Response CAL initiated 240 1 250 CALL Waitforkey CONNECT THRU BETWEEN PORTS 260 OUTPUT GNwa OPC STANE Select the fifth standard E HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 19 270 ENTER Nwa Reply Read in the 1 returned 280 290 OUTPUT 717 PG Clear the analyzer display 300 310 DISP COMPUTING CALIBRATION COEFFICIENTS 320 330 OUTPUT QNwa 0PC7 RESPDONE Finished with the CAL cycle 340 ENTER Nwa Reply t Read in the 1 returned 350 360 DISP RESPONSE CAL COMPLETED CONNECT TEST DEVICE 370 OUTPUT QNwa MEN
105. andshake 1 9 ALTAB 1 55 alternate inputs 1 55 ANAB 1 55 ANAI 1 55 analog bus 1 55 analog input 1 55 analyzer array data formats 1 18 analyzer bus mode 1 11 analyzer command syntax 1 3 analyzer control of peripherals 1 11 analyzer data reading 1 15 analyzer debug mode 2 13 analyzer features helpful in developing programs 2 13 analyzer identification 1 15 analyzer operating modes 2 3 pass control mode 2 3 2 66 system control mode 2 3 talker listener 2 3 2 64 analyzer operation 1 14 analyzer single bus concept 1 10 analyzer status reporting structure 1 24 appendage in syntax 1 4 AR 1 55 array data formats 1 17 2 26 FORM 1 2 26 FORM 2 2 26 FORM 3 2 26 FORM 4 2 24 2 26 FORM 5 2 26 arrays of data 1 21 arrays related to frequency 1 19 ASCH save format 1 74 ASCH disk files 2 72 reading 2 72 ASEG 1 55 assert sequence 1 55 ASSS 1 55 ATN attention control line 1 7 attention ATN control line 1 7 AUTO 1 55 auto feed plotter 1 71 printer 1 72 auto seale 1 55 averaging 1 55 restart 1 55 averaging factor 1 55 AVERFACT D 1 55 AVERO 1 55 AVERREST 1 55 AVG HP IB commands 1 32 B BACI D 1 55 background intensity 1 55 BANDPASS 1 55 basic talker T6 1 9 beep emit 1 60 BEEPDONE 1 55 beeper on done 1 55 index 1 beeper on warning 1 55 BEEPFAIL 1 55 BEEPWARN 1 55 begin cal sequence 1 56 bi directional lines 1 7 binary save format 1 74 BR 1 55 bus
106. annel the response to the PHAS query depends on which channel is active Identification The analyzer s response to IDN is HEWLETT PACKARD 8752C 0 X XX where X XX is the firmware revision of the instrument The analyzer also has the capability to output its serial number with the command OUTPSERN and to output its installed options with the command OUTPOPTS Output Syntax The following three types of data are transmitted by the analyzer in ASCII format m response to query certain output commands m ASCII floating point FORM 4 array transfers HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 15 Marker output commands and queried commands are output in ASCII format only meaning that each character and each digit is transmitted as a separate byte leaving the receiving computer to reconstruct the numbers and strings Numbers are transmitted as 24 character strings consisting of ao DODDDDDDDODDDDO E DD a Sign 3 digits Decimal 5 digits Point khg6 la Figure 1 3 FORM 4 ASCII Data Transfer Character String Sign for negative blank for positive 3 digits Digits to the left of the decimal point Decimal point Standard decimal point 15 digits Digits to the right of the decimal point E Exponent notation Sign gt for negative for positive Exponent Two digits for the exponent When multiple numbers are sent the numbers are separated by commas When number pairs are sent the numbers are
107. annot be modified as part of the learn string it can be stored and recalled with very little effort by storing and recalling the learn string See Chapter 1 under the section titled Data Processing Chain for details on using learn strings This example takes advantage of the computer s capabilities to simplify m creating a list frequency table w editing a list frequency table The table is entered and completely edited before being transmitted to the analyzer To simplify the programming task options such as entering center frequency frequency span or step size are not included The list frequency information may be acquired using the limit test results array The actual stimulus points are available as the first element in the array 2 52 HP BASIC Programming Examples The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence An I O path is assigned for the analyzer a The system is initialized The existing list frequencies are edited and cleared u The number of segments to define is read in w An array for the list segments is defined m The parameters for each segment are requested x If the operator wants to edit the segment parameters are re entered The new list is sent to the analyzer The analyzer is released from remote control and the program ends The program is written as follows 10 This program shows how to enter and edit a list frequency table 20 Any existing table is deleted a
108. aracteristic impedance of the measurement system Displays the desired softkey menu during a sequence NEWSEQ lt I gt must precede to ensure that a sequence is currently being created or modified Single sweep OPC compatible Sliding load done Specifies the standard as a sliding load during a standard definition as part of a cal kit modification Sliding load set OPC compatible Enters the power slope value Turns the power slope ON and OFF Select Smith chart display format The following commands select the marker readout format on a Smith chart SMIMGB SMIMLIN SMIMLOG SMIMRI SMIMRX SMOOAPER D SMOO0 lt ON OFF gt G jB Linear Log Real imaginary pairs R jX Sets the smoothing aperture as a percent of the trace Turns smoothing ON and OFF The following commands press the indicated soft Key SOFTI SOFT2 SOFTS SOFT4 SOFTS SOFT6 SOFT7 SOFTS SOFR SOUP lt ON OFF gt Softkey 1 Softkey 2 Softkey 3 Softkey 4 Softkey 5 Softkey 6 Softkey 7 Softkey 8 Displays the firmware revision on the screen Turns the source power ON and OFF 1 76 HP IB Programming and Command Reference SPAN D Sets the stimulus span If a list frequency segment is being edited sets the span of the segment SPEG Displays the specify gate menu The following commands initiate the part of modifying a cal kit After issuing each command send the analyzer a series of standard numbers to be included in the
109. b Read arrays OUTPUT Nwa USING K ZZ OUTPCALC TI Format I to add O in command ENTER ONwa_bin Hdr Lgth Read header length from array FOR J 1 TO Poin Read elements for CAL array ENTER Nwa_bin Cal I J i Cal I J 2 t Read real imag pair elements NEXT J Next location in array NEXT I Next CAL array HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 47 460 All CAL arrays have been read 470 480 INPUT PRESS RETURN TO RE TRANSMIT CALIBRATION Dum 490 500 OUTPUT Nwa FORM3 Use same format as read 510 OUTPUT ONwa Calt Send CAL type to analyzer 520 530 FOR I TO Numb 540 DISP TRANSMITTING ARRAY I 550 OUTPUT QNwa USING K ZZ INPUCALC 1I 560 OUTPUT Nwa_bin Hdr Lgth 570 FOR J i TO Poin Send each array in CAL Show array number Send array number O format Send header amp array length Send each array element a e ee ee ee pom er 580 OUTPUT CNwa_bin Cal 1 J 1 Ca1 1 J3 2 Real and Imag pair 590 NEXT J Next element in array 600 NEXT I Next array 610 1 620 OUTPUT ONwa SAVC Activate CAL 630 640 OUTPUT ONwa CONT t Restore continuous sweep 650 OUTPUT QNwa OPC WAIT Wait for analyzer to finish 660 ENTER Nwa Reply Read the i when complete 670 680 DISP Finished with CAL transfer 690 LOCAL Nwa 700 END Release HP IB control Running the Program Before executing the program perform a calibration The program is able to detect which type of calibration
110. bandwidths search can be automatically determined with MARKER SEARCH To continually update the search switch the marker tracking ON The trace maximum search will remain activated until The search is switched OFF m The tracking is switched OFF m All markers are switched OFF 1 16 HP IB Programming and Command Reference Marker data can be output to a controller by using analyzer commands These commands cause the analyzer to transmit three numbers marker value 1 marker value 2 and marker stimulus value For example in log magnitude display mode we get the log magnitude at the marker value 1 zero value 2 and the marker frequency See Table 1 3 for a complete listing of all the possibilities for values 1 and 2 The four possibilities for the marker stimulus value are z frequency time as in time domain Option 010 Only m CW time m power in power sweep mode Table 1 3 Units as a Function of Display Format Display Marker OUTPMARK OUTPFORM Format Mode dB t dB MARKER READOUT value aux value LOG MAG PHASE DELAY SMITH CHART degrees degrees degrees seconds seconds seconds LIN MKR degrees real degrees lin mag lin mag LOG MKR Re lm R jx G jB dB degrees real dB degrees imag real imag real ohms imag ohms real real ohms imag ohms real Siemens real real Siemens
111. be used by the analyzer Note that only one segment can be chosen at a time The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence An I O path is assigned for the analyzer z The system is initialized m The list frequency segment is edited a The largest segment number is set The highest segment number is requested m The number of actual segments is read in m A list frequency table is defined and the segments are read in to the controller from the analyzer a The operator selects one of the segments of the sweep The controller zooms in and sweeps the defined segment x The operator presses 0 and the analyzer returns to sweeping all the segments in the table m The activation loop is ended and the program ends The program is written as follows 10 This program shows how to select a single segment from a list 20 frequency sweep and activate it as the sweep The list frequency 30 table is read from the analyzer and displayed on the computer 40 screen The operator is prompted to select a segment and the 50 program then activates it All the segments are activated upon 60 completion 70 80 EXAMP6B 90 100 ASSIGN QNwa TO 716 Assign an 1 0 path for the analyzer 110 120 CLEAR SCREEN 130 Initialize the analyzer 140 ABORT 7 t Generate an IFC Interface Clear 150 CLEAR Nwa t SDC Selected Device Clear 160 170 Print header for table of existing segments 180 PRINT US
112. bols between the code and the appendage Note In the following cases CLEAREGID RECAREG D SAVEREG D and EG D D must be 2 characters For example CLEAREGO1 will execute while CLEAREG1 will generate a syntax error SYNTAX TYPE 3 code data unit terminator These are data input commands such as STAR 1 0 GHZ set the start frequency to 1 GHz SYNTAX TYPE 4 code appendage data terminator These are titling and marker commands that have an appendage such as TITRi STATE1 title register 1 STATE1 TITR2 TEST2 title register 2 TEST2 QUERY SYNTAX code To query a front panel equivalent function append a question mark to the root mnemonic For example POWE AVERO or REAL To query commands with integer appendages place the question mark after the appendage HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 5 HP IB Operation The Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB is Hewlett Packard s hardware software documentation and support for IEEE 488 2 and IEC 625 worldwide standards for interfacing instruments This interface allows you to operate the analyzer and peripherals in two methods m by an external system controller a by the network analyzer in system controller mode Device Types The HP IB employs a party line bus structure in which up to 15 devices can be connected on one contiguous bus The interface consists of 16 signal lines and 8 ground lines within a shielded cable With thi
113. can manipulate the functions of the analyzer by sending commands to the analyzer via the Hewlett Packard Interface Bus HP IB The commands used are specific to the analyzer Remote commands executed over the bus take precedence over manual commands executed from the instrument s front panel Remote commands are executed as soon as they are received by the analyzer A command only applies to the active channel except in cases where functions are coupled between channels Most commands are equivalent to front panel hardkeys and softkeys Command Structure in BASIC Consider the BASIC command for setting the analyzer s start frequency to 10 MHz OUTPUT 716 STAR 10 MHZ The command structure in BASIC has several different elements the BASIC command statement OUTPUT The BASIC data output statement the appendage 716 The data is directed to interface 7 HP IB and on to the device at address 16 the HP 8752C This appendage is terminated with a semicolon The next appendage is STAR the instrument mnemonic for setting the analyzer s start frequency data 10 asingle operand used by the root mnemonic STAR to set the value unit MHZ the units that the operand is expressed in terminator indicates the end of a command enters the data and deactivates the active entry area The STAR 10 MHZ command performs the same function as pressing the following keys on the analyzer s front panel CD OO GD STAR is the root mnem
114. ch data pair Table 2 11 Example Output OUTPSEGAM min max for all segments SEGMENTS SEGMENT MIN PT MAX PT MAX PT REPORTED NUMBER STIMULUS STIMULUS VALUE FREQUENCY FREQUENCY dB 2 12 GHz 2 12 2 6 GHz 3 1 Table 2 11 is an interpretation of the min max data returned using the OUTPSEGAM command 2 88 HP BASIC Programming Examples Example Program of OUTPSEGAM Using BASIC The following program is not included on the Programming Examples disk 10 Minmax l 20 Mm IMAGE DD 2X D DDDE 2X SD DDDE 2X D DDDE 2X 5D DDDE 30 PRINT TESTING OUTPSEGAM min max points for each segment 40 OUTPUT 716 minmaxon i 50 OUTPUT 716 outpsegam 60 ENTER 716 Numsegs 70 PRINT receiving data for Numsegs segments 80 FOR 1 1 TO Numsegs 90 ENTER 716 Segnum Minstim Minval Maxstim Maxval 100 PRINT USING Mm Segnum Minstim Minval Maxstim Maxval 110 NEXT I os HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 89 went Output Data Per Point The HP IB command OUTPDATP returns the value of the selected point using FORM4 ASCII The point is selected using the SELPT N command This returns the last point if the selected point is out of range Otherwise it uses the same format as that used by the marker value command These formats are as follows Table 2 12 Example Output OUTPDATP data per point Example Format Mode Readout Format Returns LIN MER Re Im real imag LIN MKR 0 6667 0 8867 9 7E 39 5 356 15
115. class When the class is full send CLAD to terminate the sequence SPECFWDT Forward transmission SPECRESP Response SPECRESI Resp amp Isol response SPECS11A RFL opens SPECS11B REL shorts SPECSI1C RFL loads SPLD lt ON OFF gt Turns the split display mode ON and OFF SRE D Service request enable A bit set in D enables the corresponding bit in the status byte to generate an SRQ SSEG D Selects the desired segment of the frequency list for a list frequency sweep STB Outputs the status byte The following commands select a standard from a class during a calibration sequence If a class is requested as in CLASSI1A open reflection 1 port cal the analyzer will do one of two things If there is only one standard in the class it will measure that standard automatically If there are several standards in the class then one of the following commands must be used to select one causing it to be measured All of these commands are OPC compatible STANA Standard listed under softkey 1 STANB Standard listed under softkey 2 STANC Standard listed under softkey 3 STAND Standard listed under softkey 4 STANE Standard listed under softkey 5 STANF Standard listed under softkey 6 STANG Standard listed under softkey 7 STAR D Enters the start stimulus value If a list frequency segment is being edited sets the start of the segment STDD Standard done define standard sequence while modifying a cal kit The follo
116. commands load the file from disk with the name indicated by the previous TITFn command The actual file recalled depends on the file title in the file position specified Requires pass control mode LOAD1 LOAD2 LOADS LOAD4 LOAD5 Loads the file from disk using the file name provided by the preceding TITF1 command Loads the file from disk using the file name provided by the preceding TITF2 command Loads the file from disk using the file name provided by the preceding TITF3 command Loads the file from disk using the file name provided by the preceding TITF4 command Loads the file from disk using the file name provided by the preceding TITF5 command These commands load the indicated sequence from disk Requires pass control mode when using the HP IB port LOADSEQ1 LOADSEQ2 LOADSEQ3 LOADSEQ4 LOADSEQ5 LOADSEQ6 LOGFREQ LOGM LOOC D LOWPIMPU LOWPSTEP LRN LRN D MANTRIG Loads sequence 1 from disk Loads sequence 2 from disk Loads sequence 3 from disk Loads sequence 4 from disk Loads sequence 5 from disk Loads sequence 6 from disk Selects a log frequency sweep Selects the log magnitude display format Sets the value of the sequencing loop counter NEWSEQ lt I gt must precede to ensure that a sequence is currently being created or modified Turns ON the low pass impulse transform Option 010 Turns ON the low pass step transform Option 010 Same as OUTPLEAS Same as INPULEAS
117. control mode is used to allow the network analyzer to dump a screen display to a printer Pass control mode allows the analyzer to control the printer while sending the screen display to be printed The analyzer requests control from the instrument controller and the controller allows the analyzer to take control of the HP IB and dump the plot The instrument controller must not interact with the HP IB while this remote analyzer control is taking place Once the printer dump operation is complete the analyzer passes control back to the controller and the controller continues programming the analyzer Note The analyzer assumes that the addres HP IB addresses menu under If this address is incorrect control will not return to the computer Similarly if control is passed to the analyzer while it is in talker listener mode control will not return to the computer its the computer is correctly stored i Control should not be passed to the analyzer before it has set event status register bit 1 making it Request Active Control If the analyzer receives contro before the bit is set control is passed immediately back to the controller When the analyzer becomes the active system controller it is free to address devices to talk and listen as required The only functions denied the analyzer are the ability to assert the interface clear line IFC and the remote line REN These are reserved for the master system controller As th
118. ction measurement 210 OUTPUT ONwa MENUOFF Turn softkey menu off 220 230 OUTPUT Nwa CALIS111 1 Sit 1 port CAL initiated 240 250 CALL Waitforkey CONNECT OPEN AT RELECTION PORT 260 OUTPUT QONwa CLASS11A Open reflection CAL 270 OUTPUT Nwa OPC STANB Select the second standard B 280 ENTER Nwa Reply Read in the 1 returned 290 l 300 CALL Waitforkey CONNECT SHORT AT REFLECTION PORT 310 OUTPUT QNwa CLASS11B t Short reflection CAL 320 OUTPUT ONwa 0PC STANB i Select the second standard B HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 21 330 ENTER CNwa Reply Read in the 1 returned 340 350 CALL Waitforkey CONNECT LOAD AT REFLECTION PORT 360 OUTPUT Nwa OPC CLASS1iC Reflection load CAL 370 ENTER Nwa Reply Read in the 1 returned 380 390 DUTPUT 717 PG Clear the analyzer display 400 410 DISP COMPUTING CALIBRATION COEFFICIENTS 420 430 OUTPUT ONwa DONE Finished with the CAL cycle 440 OUTPUT QNwa 0PC SAV1 Save the ONE PORT CAL 450 ENTER QNwa Reply Read in the 1 returned 460 470 DISP REFLECTION PORT CAL COMPLETED CONNECT TEST DEVICE 480 OUTPUT QNwa MENUON t Turn on the softkey menu 490 500 OUTPUT ONwa OPC 7 WAIT t Wait for the analyzer to finish 510 ENTER Nwa Reply Read the i when complete 520 LOCAL Nwa Release HP IB control 530 540 END 550 560 okkio o soe de dolo Subroutines 4 AIA eat 2 COR I oe sh OC o k e e he k 570
119. cussed in this section can be found on the HP 8752C HP BASIC Programming Examples disk received with the analyzer m Example 1 Measurement Setup Example 1A Setting Parameters Example 1B Verifying Parameters m Example 2 Measurement Calibration Example 2A Response Measurement Calibration Example 2B Reflection 1 Port Measurement Calibration Example 3 Measurement Data Transfer Example 3A Data Transfer Using Markers Example 3B Data Transfer Using FORM 4 ASCII Format Example 3C Data Transfer Using Floating Point Numbers Example 3D Data Transfer Using Frequency Array Information Example 3E Data Transfer Using FORM 1 Internal Binary Format Example 4 Measurement Process Synchronization Example 4A Using the Error Queue Example 4B Generating Interrupts m Example 5 Network Analyzer System Setups Example 5A Using the Learn String Example 5B Reading Calibration Data Example 5C Saving and Restoring the Analyzer Instrument State Example 6 Limit Line Testing Example 6A Setting up a List Frequency Sweep Example 6B Selecting a Single Segment from a Table of Segments Example 6C Setting Up Limit Lines Example 6D Performing PASS FAIL Tests While Tuning m Example 7 Report Generation Example 7A1 Analyzer Operation Using the Talker Listener Mode Example 7A2 Controlling Peripherals with the Pass Control Mode Example 7B Plotting to a File and Transferring the File Data to a Plotter Utilizing PC Graphics Applications Using th
120. cy segment is being edited sets the center of the list segment Make channel 1 the active channel OPC compatible Make channel 2 the active channel OPC compatible Places the analyzer in the chop measurement mode As opposed to ALTAB Class done modify cal kit specify class 1 56 HP IB Programming and Command Reference These commands call reflection standard classes during a calibration sequence If only one standard is in the class it is measured If there is more than one the standard being used must be selected with STAN lt A BICIDIEIFIG gt If there is only one standard in the class these commands are OPC compatible CLASS11A Reflection 1 port opens k CLASS11B Reflection 1 port shorts i CLASS11C Reflection 1 port loads l i These commands OPC compatible clear the indicated save recall registers CLEA 1 Clears save recall register 1 CLEA2 Clears save recall register 2 CLEA3 Clears save recall register 3 E CLEA4 Clears save recall register 4 CLEA5 Clears save recall register 5 CLEARALL Clears all the save recall registers OPC compatible CLEAREG I Clears save recall registers 01 through 31 CLEAREGO1 through CLEAREGOS are the same as CLEA1 through CLEAS CLEABIT D Clears the specified bit 0 to 3 on the test set 1 0 interconnect CLEAL Clears the limit line list Should be preceded by EDITLIML CLEL Clears the desired list This could be a frequency list power loss list cal sensor list or l
121. d easy way to read an instrument state The learn string includes all front panel settings the limit table for each channel and the list frequency table It can be read out of the analyzer with the command OUTPLEAS and input to the analyzer with the command INPULEAS This array is transmitted in FORM 1 the internal format for the analyzer The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence w An I O path is assigned for the analyzer u The system is initialized m The string storage is allocated The learn string is requested m The string is read without any processing m The analyzer is released from remote control 2 44 HP BASIC Programming Examples The instrument state is changed by the operator s The learn string is sent back to the analyzer u The analyzer is released from remote control and the program ends The program is written as follows 1 This program shows how to retrieve a learn string from the analyzer 2 into a string array The state of the analyzer is then changed and the 3 learn string re loaded to return the analyzer to the previous settings 4 1 5 EXAMPSA 6 i 7 OPTION BASE 1 8 ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 Assign an 1 0 path for the analyzer 9 ASSIGN QNwa bin TO 716 FORMAT OFF 10 11 CLEAR SCREEN 12 Initialize the analyzer 13 ABORT 7 Generate an IFC Interface Clear 14 CLEAR Nwa SDC Selected Device Clear E 15 i 16 INTEGER Header Length 2 byte header and length
122. definition during cal kit modification D is the standard number DELA Displays the data formatted as group delay DELO Turns the delta marker mode OFF These commands make the indicated marker the delta reference DELR1 Marker 1 DELR2 Marker 2 DELR3 Marker 3 DELR4 Marker 4 DELR5 Marker 5 DELRFIXM Fixed marker DEMOAMPL Sets the transform demodulation to amplitude demodulation Only has an effect with a CW time transform DEMOOFF Turns the transform demodulation function OFF DEMOPHAS Sets the transform demodulation to phase demodulation HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 59 DFLT DIRS D DISCUNIT D DISCVOLU D DISM lt ON OFF gt Sets the plotter to the following default setup conditions Plot Data On Pen Number Plot Mem On Data 2 Plot Grat On Memory 5 Plot Text On Graticule 1 Plot Mkr On Text 7 Auto feed On Marker 7 Scale Plot Full Line Type Plot Speed Fast Data 7 Memory 7 Sets the number of files in the directory at disk initialization Specifies which disk in a multiple disk disk drive is to be used for disk registers Specifies which volume of a multiple volume disk drive e g a Winchester is to be used for disk registers Displays the response and stimulus values for all markers that are turned ON These commands display the indicated combinations of data and trace memory on the active channel DISPDATA DISPDATM DISPDDM DISPDMM DISPMEMO DIVI DONE DONM DOSEQ lt I gt DOWN DUAC
123. device modes 1 10 bus structure 1 6 1 7 C C10 pass control capabilities 1 9 C1 C2 C3 system controller capabilities 1 9 C1 D 1 56 C2 D 1 56 C3 D 1 56 CALI 1 56 CALFCALFID 1 56 CALFFREQID 1 56 CALFSENA 1 56 CALFSENB 1 56 CAL HP IB commands 1 32 calibrating the test setup 2 10 calibration arrays 1 28 calibration coefficients 1 21 calibration command sequence 1 28 calibration data 2 46 inputting 2 46 outputting 2 46 reading 2 46 calibration example program 2 18 calibration kit 2 2 calibration kit HP IB commands 1 33 calibration kits 1 56 2 18 calibration kit string and learn string 1 23 calibration type off 1 56 CALIRAI 1 56 CALIRESP 1 56 CALIS111 1 56 CALK35MD 1 56 CALK35MM 1 56 CALK7MM 1 56 cal kit done 1 63 CALKN50 1 56 CALKN75 1 56 CALKUSED 1 56 CALN 1 56 cal sensor table edit 1 56 cal sequence begin 1 56 resume 1 73 CBRI D 1 56 Index 2 CENT D 1 56 center 1 56 chain for data processing 1 21 CHANI 1 56 CHANZ2 1 56 CHANNEL HP IB commands 1 34 channels coupled 1 58 characters that are valid 1 4 CHOPAB 1 56 citifile save format 1 74 CLAD 1 56 CLASS11A 1 57 CLASS11B 1 57 CLASS11C 1 57 class done 1 56 CLEABIT D 1 57 CLEA lt I gt 1 57 CLEAL 1 57 CLEARALL 1 57 clear device 1 12 CLEAREG lt I gt 1 57 clearing any messages waiting to be output 2 7 clearing syntax errors 2 7 clearing the input command buffer 2 7 clear
124. device trigger 1 13 device types for HP IB 1 6 DFLT 1 59 directory size LIF 1 60 DIRS D 1 60 disabling the front panel 1 13 DISCUNIT D 1 60 DISCVOLU D 1 60 disk load file 1 65 disk drive address 1 55 disk drive unit 1 60 disk drive volume 1 60 disk file names 1 29 disk files HP IB commands 1 43 disk format 1 62 DISM 1 60 DISPDATA 1 60 DISPDATM 1 60 DISPDDM 1 60 DISPDMM 1 60 display A B 1 55 display A R 1 55 display B R 1 55 display data 1 60 display data mem 1 60 display data amp mem 1 60 display data mem 1 60 display data to mem 1 58 display format units 1 17 DISPLAY HP IB commands 1 36 display memory 1 60 DISPMEMO 1 60 DIVI 1 60 does not respond to parallel poll PPO 1 9 done with class 1 60 with isolation 1 63 DONE 1 60 done modify sequence 1 60 DONM 1 60 DOSEQ lt I gt 1 60 Index 4 do sequence 1 60 DOS format 1 62 DOWN 1 60 DT1 responds to a group execute trigger 1 9 DUAC 1 60 dual channels 1 60 duplicate sequence 1 60 DUPLSEQ lt X gt SEQ lt Y gt 1 60 E E2 tri state drivers 1 9 edit cal sensor table 1 56 EDITDONE 1 60 edit limit table 1 60 EDITLIML 1 60 EDITLIST 1 60 edit power loss range 1 71 edit power loss table 1 71 edit segment 1 75 ELED D 1 60 EMIB 1 60 emit beep 1 60 end or identify 1 5 end or identify EOI control line 1 7 ENTO 1 61 ENTRY HP IB commands 1 37 entry off 1 61 EOI 1 5 EOI end o
125. display CAUTION SYNTAX ERROR and the incorrect command pointing to the first character it did not understand The SRQ can be cleared by reading the event status register and clearing the latched bit or by clearing the enable registers with CLES The syntax error message on the analyzer display can only be cleared by the HP IB Device Clear DCL message or Selected Device Clear SDC message Device Clear is not commonly used because it clears every device on the bus Selected Device Clear can be used to reset the input and output queue and the registers of a specific instrument on the bus This will also clear all the interrupt definitions Syntax errors are created when a command cannot be interpreted by the input parser of the analyzer The controller releases the analyzer from remote control and the program ends HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 43 Example 5 Network Analyzer System Setups Saving and Recalling Instrument States A Note The most efficient option for storing and recalling analyzer states is using the analyzer s internal registers to save the CAL data Recalling these registers is the fastest solution to restoring analyzer setups See the Printing Plotting and Saving Measurement Results chapter in the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide for detailed information on the analyzer s internal storage registers In the event that all the registers have been used or if internal memory limitations exist then these exter
126. ds ee eo A ee eH RS el He Se 1 13 Trigger a Ba ae Ok Bess a A A a 1 13 Analyzer Operation sw A Soe ae a oo a a a 1 14 Operation Complete oaoa a e a a E ee eed A 1 14 Reading Analyzer Data sm ema be ee ae ee dle ee es a es 1 15 Output QUEUE y pe e Beat cx BF ce Ge A ee O e OD A A 1 15 Command Query fees ro as a S E E 1 15 o Tdentifcanom sd sas mad bd e E eee tes a a A E 1 15 a a sao Ge Soh ee Be ewe a ee ee DDS E yee ee ee A 1 15 ae Marker data bio ts a oe de Pm Ba Uh ARDE tad ay te e E g g a ee we 1 16 o Array Data Formats DE ee AS te A E Oe a A e 1 17 Contents 1 Trace Data Transfers LR E ea Sa A a ee Stmulus Rel ated Values mes mee a ea ae we e Data Processing Chama a y a a E AAA AE de A a Data Arrays A E A A A O A A A E OR A Fast Data Transfer Commands 2 et wee ee ea Data Levels A ra a a rr a a o o ss Learn String and Calibration Kit String 2 a 1 Error Reporting Status Reporting The Status Byte 10 4 o ess 8 8 au e 8 BP o a ER RS w ee ey O er OS A A ae A CS A Ss FOR A A i CE DOR E Oe o v aa a so o o e ca cui o a J The Event Status Register and Event Status Register B 2 1 ee Error Output Calibration Disk File Names Using Key Codes AS a o a ar sv sa cuia via ais ADE CO CRE O Cm SO E C o ARO SO E RS o ri CEE A A O
127. e 2 5 LOGFREQ 1 65 LOGM 1 65 log mag 1 65 log sweep 1 65 LOOC D 1 65 loop counter decrement 1 58 increment 1 63 loop counter value 1 65 lower limit segment 1 64 low pass frequency 1 76 low pass impulse 1 65 low pass step 1 65 LOWPIMPU 1 65 LOWPSTEP 1 65 M MANTRIG 1 65 MARKBUCKID 1 49 MARKCENT 1 66 MARKCONT 1 66 MARKCOUP 1 66 MARKCW 1 66 MARKDELA 1 66 MARKDISC 1 66 marker bandwidth search 1 80 marker data 1 16 MARKER FCTN HP IB commands 1 42 MARKER HP IB commands 1 41 marker parameters print 1 72 marker positioning 2 24 by data point location 2 24 by frequency location 2 24 by trace data value 2 24 marker range 1 66 markers continuous 1 66 discrete 1 66 displayed 1 60 markers coupled 1 66 marker search left 1 75 maximum 1 75 minimum 1 75 off 1 75 right 1 75 target 1 75 tracking 1 79 markers off 1 66 marker statistics 1 67 markers uncoupled 1 66 marker to CW frequency 1 66 marker to limit offset 1 64 marker to middie segment 1 66 marker to stimulus segment 1 66 marker width 1 80 marker zero 1 66 MARKFAUVI D 1 66 MARKFSTI D 1 66 MARKFVALID 1 66 MARK lt I gt D 1 66 MARKMIDD 1 66 MARKMINI 1 66 MARKOFF 1 66 index 7 MARKREF 1 66 MARKSPAN 1 66 MARKSTAR 1 66 MARKSTIM 1 66 MARKSTOP 1 66 MARKUNCO 1 66 MARKZERO 1 66 MAXFI D 1 66 MEASA 1 66 MEASB 1 67 MEAS HP IB commands 1 38 MEASR 1 67 MEASTAT 1 67
128. e analyzer s front panel The computer can ascertain the new power level using the analyzer s command query function If a question mark is appended to the root of a command the analyzer will output the value of that function For instance POWE 7 DB sets the source power to 7 dB and POWE outputs the current RF source power at the test port When the analyzer receives POWE it prepares to transmit the current RF source power level This condition illuminates the analyzer front panel talk light T In this case the analyzer transmits the output power to the controller ON OFF commands can also be queried The reply is a one 1 if the function is ON or a zero 0 if it is OFF For example if a command controls an active function that is underlined on the analyzer display querying that command yields a one 1 if the command is underlined or a zero 0 if it is not As another example there are nine options on the format menu and only one option is underlined at a time Only the underlined option will return a one when queried For instance send the command string DUAC to the analyzer If dual channel display is switched ON the analyzer will return a one 1 to the instrument controller Similarly to determine if phase is being measured and displayed send the command string PHAS to the analyzer In this case the analyzer will return a one 1 if phase is currently being displayed Since the command only applies to the active ch
129. e cyan magenta blue yellow green red or black PCOLDATA 1 lt COLOR gt PCOLDATA 2 lt COLOR gt PCOLMEMO1 lt COLOR gt PCOLMEMO2 lt COLOR gt PCOLGRAT lt COLOR gt PCOLTEXT lt COLOR gt PCOLWARN lt COLOR gt PDATA lt ON OFF gt Channel 1 data Channel 2 data Channel 1 memory Channel 2 memory Graticule Display text Warning text Selects whether trace data is plotted These commands select the pen for plotting the indicated display feature for the active channel PENNDATA D PENNGRAT D _PENNMARK D Data trace Graticule Markers and marker text 1 70 HP IB Programming and Command Reference PENNMEMO D _ Memory trace PENNTEXT D Text and user graphics PGRAT lt ON OFF gt Selects whether the graticule is plotted PHAO D Sets the phase offset PHAS Selects the phase display format PLOS lt SLOW FAST gt Selects the pen speed for plotting PLOT Initiates a plot Requires pass control mode PLTPRTDISK Sets the plotter port to disk PLTPRTHPIB Sets the plotter port to HP IB PLTTRAUTF lt ONIOFF gt Turns ON and OFF the plotter auto feed PLITRFORF Sends a form feed to the plotter PLITYPHPGL Selects HPGL compatible printer as the plotter type PLITYPPLIR Selects plotter as the plotter type PMEM lt ON OFF gt Selects whether memory is plotted PMKR lt ON OFF gt Selects whether markers are plotted PMTRTTIT Reads power meter HP IB value into title string NEWSEQ lt I gt must precede to ensu
130. e segment number max stimulus max value min stimulus min value for all active segments T Outputs limit test min max for a specified segment See SELSEG D Refer to the Limit Line and Data Point Special Functions section in Chapter 2 t For the definition of a limit segment see Example Display of Limit Lines in the Chapter 2 section titled Limit Line and Data Point Special Functions 1 52 HPAB Programming and Command Reference Data point Data range Limit test chi Limit test ch2 Limit test status Limit test status Last point First point Specify point Table 1 9 HP IB Only Commands continued OUTPDATP OUTPDATR OUTPLIMI OUTPLIM2 OUTPSEGAF OUTPSEGF OUTPFAIP MINMAX lt ON OFF gt SELSEG D SELMAXPTID SELMINPT D SELPT D Outputs trace data indexed by point see SELPT D Outputs trace data for range of points see SELMINPTID SELMAXPTIDD Outputs status of limit test for channel 1 Outputs status of limit test for channel 2 Outputs the segment number and its limit test status3for all active segments Outputs the limit test status for a specified segment See SELSEG D This command is similar to OUTPLIMF except that it reports the number of failures first followed by the stimulus and trace values for each failed point in the test and max values are recorded per limit segment Selects segment number for the OUTPS
131. e HP 8752C network analyzer i This bit is not used with the HP 8752C network analyzer 2 Check event status register B One of the enabled bits in event status register B has been set 3 Check error queue An error has occurred and the message has been placed in the error queue but has not been read yet 4 Message in output queue A command has prepared information to be output but it has not been read yet 5 Check event status register One of the enabled bits in the event status register has been set 6 Request service One of the enabled status byte bits is causing an SRQ Preset An instrument preset has been executed Event Status Register y A e O Operation complete A command for which OPC has been enabled has completed operation 1 Request control The analyzer has been commanded to perform an operation that requires control of a peripheral and needs control of HP IB Requires pass control mode 2 Query error The analyzer has been addressed to talk but there is nothing in the output queue to transmit 3 Sequence Bit A sequence has executed the assert SRQ command 4 Execution error A command was received that could not be executed 5 Syntax error The incoming HP IB commands contained a syntax error The syntax error is can only be cleared by a device clear or an instrument preset 6 User request The operator has pressed a front panel key or turned the RPG Power on A power
132. e Plot File Example 7C Reading ASCII Disk Files to the Instrument Controller s Disk File 2 12 HP BASIC Programming Examples Program Information The following information is provided for every example program included on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk a A program description a An outline of the program s processing sequence a A step by step instrument command level tutorial explanation of the program including 5 The command mnemonic and command name for the HP IB instrument command used in the program o An explanation of the operations and effects of the HP IB instrument commands used in the program Note The HP BASIC programming code for each of these examples is contained in HP BASIC Programming Examples Analyzer Features Helpful in Developing Programming Routines sedi Analyzer Debug Mode The analyzer debug mode aids you in developing programming routines The analyzer displays the commands being received If a syntax error occurs the analyzer displays the last buffer and points to the first character in the command line that it could not understand You can enable this mode from the front panel by pressing HP IB DIAG ON The debug mode remains activated until you preset the analyzer or deactivate the mode You can also enable this mode over the HP IB using the DEBUON command and disable the debug mode using the DEBUOFF executable User Controllable Sweep There are three important advant
133. e active system controller the analyzer can send and receive messages from printers plotters and disk drives The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence An I O path is assigned for the analyzer The system is initialized m The status registers are cleared Bit 1 of ESR request control is set m The ESR interrupt for SRQ is enabled The pass control mode is enabled m The data is dumped to the printer a The program loops until the SRQ bit is set m The status byte is read with a serial poll m The program tests for bit 6 SRQ 2 66 HP BASIC Programming Examples m If SRQ is detected the program tests for pass control bit 5 of the status byte m If the analyzer requests control the system controller gives the analyzer control of the bus m The program loops and waits for the analyzer to complete the print dump m The analyzer reads the interface m If bit 6 is active in the controller control is returned from the analyzer to the controller am The status byte assignments are cleared The analyzer returns to continuous sweep mode z The analyzer is returned to local control and the program ends The program is written as follows 10 20 30 40 50 60 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 230 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 This example shows a pass control operation to print the display under the analyzer HP IB control The controller reads the
134. e ee ee ee es Using List Frequency Mode 2 6 6 ee ee ee ee es Example 6A Setting Up a List Frequency Sweep 6 2 7 o Running the Program sensu EA ID RA AAA Example 6B Selecting a Single Segment from a Table of Segments Running the Program use mom a ee ES q ee Be Using Limit Lines to Perform PASS FAIL Tests 2 2 es Example 6C Setting Up Limit Lines 2 2 6 2 0 eee ee aa Running the Program sa ga da doses S we ow AR de a Er AS Example 6D Performing PASS FAIL Tests While Tuning Running the Program ssa a do aS Be a A a E Example 7 Report Generation o ee we ee rosas Example 7Al Operation Using Talker Listener Mode Running the Program v4 da Bad Slew IE Ye Ee ee tee Example 7A2 Controlling Peripherals Using Pass Control Mode Running the Program sans A ABE A SECR Gi VE a dp E Example 7B Plotting to a File and Transferring File Data to a Plotter Running the Program s aao e q sa a om BS ee Sk ea WS Utilizing PC Graphics Applications Using the Plot File Example 7C Reading ASCII Disk Files to the System Controller Disk File Running the Program oi ce Ak e ce we e Ba or SE ee ea 2 a Limit Line and Data Point Special Functions 2 2 ee OVERVIEW oh q de a Ke Whe A a oe ee ee Giang Example Display of Limit Lines a 6 0 o ee ee we ee lamit Segments e a we Bde dre a A AA A ee es Output RESUS
135. e error queue The error number is transmitted then the error message in ASCII format Formatted Outputs the formatted trace data from the active channel in current display units See Table 1 3 for data transmitted Fast data transfer command for OUTPFORM Only the first number of the OUTPFORM data pairs is transferred See Table 1 3 Outputs identification string same as IDN Outputs the code of the last key pressed in ASCII format See Figure 1 6 for key codes A 1 is transmitted for a knob tum OUTPLEAS Learn string Outputs the learn string a less than 3 000 byte string in form 1 OUTPSEQ lt I gt Sequencing Outputs sequence I I 1 to 6 listing over HP IB OUTPLIMP Limit failures Outputs the limit results as described under OUTPLIML for only those stimulus points that failed OUTPLIML Outputs the limit test results for each stimulus point The results consist of four numbers The first is the stimulus value tested the second is the test result 1 for no test 6 for fail 1 for pass The third number is the upper limit value and the fourth is the lower limit value This is a form 4 transfer HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 51 Table 1 9 HP IB Only Commands continued Action Mmemonic Symtex Description OUTPUT continued Limit marker Marker Marker statistics Bandwidth Bandwidth loss Options Print
136. eader The first two bytes represent the string A the standard block header The second two bytes are an integer representing the number of bytes in the block to follow FORM 1 is best applied when rapid data transfers not to be modified by the computer nor interpreted by the user are required IEEE 32 bit floating point format 8 bytes per data point The data is preceded by the same header as in FORM1 Each number consists of a 1 bit sign an 8 bit biased exponent and a 23 bit mantissa FORM 2 is the format of choice if your computer supports single precision floating point numbers IEEE 64 bit floating point format 16 bytes per data point The data is preceded by the same header as in FORM 1 Each number consists of a 1 bit sign an 11 bit biased exponent and a 52 bit mantissa This format may be used with double precision floating point numbers No additional precision is available in the analyzer data but FORM 3 may be a convenient form for transferring data to your computer ASCII floating point format The data is transmitted as ASCII numbers as described previously in Output Syntax There is no header The analyzer always uses FORM 4 to transfer data that is not related to array transfers i e marker responses and instrument settings PC DOS 32 bit floating point format with 4 bytes per number 8 bytes per data point The data is preceded by the same header as in FORM 1 The byte order is reversed to comply with PC DOS
137. egister 1 Register 2 Register 3 Register 4 Register 5 Saves to save recall registers 01 through 31 SAVEREGO1 through SAVEREGOS are the same as SAVE1 through SAVES OPC compatible The following commands define the format for saving files to disk SAVUASCI SAVUBINA SAVEUSEK SCAL D SCAP lt FULL GRAT gt SDEL Selects ASCII format for saving to disk Aiso known as citifile format Selects binary format for saving to disk Stores the active calibration kit as the user kit Sets the trace scale factor Selects a full plot or a plot where the graticule is expanded to P1 and P2 During either a list frequency or a limit table edit deletes the current segment 1 74 HP IB Programming and Command Reference SDON During either a list frequency or a limit table edit closes a segment after editing These commands control the marker searches The marker searches place the active marker according to the indicated search criteria The search is continuously updated if tracking is ON SEAL SEAMAX SEAMIN SEAOFF SEAR SEATARG D SEDI D SELL D SELMAXPT D SELMINPT D SELPT D SELSEG D SEQ lt I gt Search left for next occurrence of the target value Trace maximum Trace minimum Turns the marker search OFF Search right for next occurrence of the target value Arbitrary target amplitude During either a frequency or a limit table edit selects segment D for editing Selects the lea
138. equence REMOTE 716 LOCAL LOCKOUT 7 After executing the code above none of front panel keys will respond The analyzer can be returned to local mode temporarily with LOCAL 716 As soon as the analyzer is addressed to listen it goes back into local lockout mode The only way to clear the local lockout mode aside from cycling line power is to execute LOCAL 7 This command un asserts the remote line on the interface This puts the instrument into local mode and clears the local lockout command Return the instrument to remote mode by pressing VO Paths One of the features of HP BASIC is the use of input output paths The instrument may be addressed directly by the instrument s device number as shown in the previous examples However a more sophisticated approach is to declare I O paths such as ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 Assigning an I O path builds a look up table in the computer s memory that contains the device address codes and several other parameters It is easy to quickly change addresses throughout the entire program at one location 1 0 operation is more efficient because it uses a table in place of calculating or searching for values related to I O In the more elaborate examples where file I O is discussed the look up table contains all the information about the file Execution speed is increased because the computer no longer has to calculate a device s address each time that device is addressed 2 8 HP BASIC Programmi
139. er 3 Call each class used by the calibration type such a HP IB 4 If a class has more than one standard in it select a standard from the menu presented STANA to STANG over HP IB 5 If during a calibration two standards are measured to satisfy one class the class must be closed with DONE 6 Declare the calibration done such as with 1 SAVi over HP IB The STANA to STANG commands are all held commands because they trigger a sweep If a class has only one standard in it which means that it will trigger a sweep when called the class command will be held also Note Since different calibration kits can have a different number of standards in a given class any automated calibration sequence is valid only for a specific calibration kit Table 1 6 Calibration Arrays Array Response Response and Reflection Isolation l port 1 ER or ET Ex Ep Ep Er Er 1 Response and isolation corrects for crosstalk and transmission tracking in transmission measurements and for directivity and reflection tracking in reflection measurements Meaning of first subscript D directivity S source match R reflection tracking X crosstalk L load match T transmission tracking 1 28 HPAB Programming and Command Reference Disk File Names Disk files created by the analyzer consist of a state name of up to eight characters such as FILTER appended with up to two characters In LIF format the file name is FILT
140. er Range of Points Output Limit Pass Fail by Channel Index Contents 4 E O O E s a s a a i s wa cn a e a b io r a O A O 2 85 2 87 2 88 2 89 2 90 2 91 2 92 Figures SS E E EEEE 1 1 HPSB Bus Structure ap pise E So E E RR a Gea e 1 7 1 2 Analyzer Single Bus Concept 2 0 1 6 6 6 ee a ee 1 10 1 3 FORM 4 ASCII Data Transfer Character String 2544 1 16 1 4 The Data Processing Ghain ce ck a qu Gm aA SS a te me aS 1 21 1 5 Status Reporting Structure s cc css css a as es ds a ao 1 24 16 Rey Codes vos e E es hy de we ke a JE SO VR a a we SR a a a a 1 30 2 1 The HP 8752C Network Analyzer System with Controller 2 2 2 2 Status Reporting Structure ea Se SAE GR ee GS SS 2 37 2 3 Limit Segments Versus Limit Lines 0 et ee 2 80 Tables 1 1 Code Naming Convention as bund 4 2 a al e a O A 1 3 1 2 OPC compatible Commands sv a Em wie Res ess a eS ES 1 14 1 3 Units as a Function of Display Format a 2 1 2 ee e 1 17 1 4 HP 8752C Network Analyzer Array Data Formats 4 1 18 1 5 Status Bit Definitions a ao so es a RA A E 1 25 6 Calibration Arrays a Se we ew Shee a ee AE a 1 28 17 Disk File Names EEES E 1 29 1 8 Key Select Codes aa yo ee ee we HOE A ECR BE eG 1 32 1 9 HP IB Only Commands sas E mete te OA ee oe ee 0 DO aes 1 49 2 1 Additional BASIC 6 2 Programming Information
141. er to talk the plotter to listen and then releasing control of the analyzer in order to transfer the data The analyzer will then make the plot or print When it is finished it asserts the End or Identify EOI control line on HP IB The controller detects the presence of EOI and re asserts control of the HP IB This example program makes a plot using the talker listener mode A ge ia iii ee lil a a Note One of the attributes of the OUTPPLOT command is that the plot can include the current softkey menu The plotting of the softkeys is enabled with the i command PSOFTON and disabled with PSOFTOFF No A rm The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence An I O path is assigned for the analyzer m The system is initialized The selected frequency span is swept once m The plot command is sent to the analyzer a The analyzer is set to talker mode and the plotter is set to listener mode The plot is spooled to the plotter m The analyzer is set to listener mode when the controller detects an EOI from the analyzer m The controller puts the analyzer back in continuous sweep mode The analyzer is returned to local control and the program ends 2 64 HP BASIC Programming Examples coro The program is written as follows 10 This example shows a plot operation under the control of the 20 analyzer The analyzer is commanded to output plot data the 30 plotter is addressed to listen and the analyzer t
142. ere are no limits available the analyzer transmits zeros For this example we delete the limit test information and keep the stimulus information In Example 3C the limit test array is read into the controller and used to provide the values directly from the analyzer memory Reading from the limit test array is convenient although it outputs the results in ASCII format form 4 which may be slow If there is no other way to obtain the frequency data this transfer time may be acceptable Frequency information becomes more difficult to determine when not using the linear sweep mode Log frequency sweeps and list frequency sweeps have quite different values for each data point For these special cases the additional time spent reading out the limit test results is an acceptable solution for obtaining the valid frequency information for each data point in the trace HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 23 Example 3A Data Transfer Using Markers Note This program is stored as EXAMP3A on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer Markers are the simplest form of trace data transfer A marker may be positioned using one of three methods m by a frequency location m by an actual data point location m by a trace data value In the following example the marker is positioned on the trace s maximum value Once positioned on the trace the trace data at that point can be read into the controller The marker
143. erring the measurement data 2 11 transfers and formats of trace data 2 23 troubleshooting 2 3 2 5 U user controllable sweep 2 13 y verifying HP IB operation 2 2 index 3
144. es disk received with the network analyzer Table 2 3 HP 8752C Network Analyzer Array Data Formats Format type Type of Data Bytes per Bytes per point 201 Total Bytes Data Value 2 data values Bytes per trace add header 3 FORM 1 Internal Binary 6 1206 1210 1612 IEEE 32 bit Floating Point IEEE 64 bit Floating Point FORM 2 FORM 3 3220 FORM 4 FORM 5 ASCI Numbers 10 050 1220 PC DOS 32 bit Floating Point No header is used in FORM 4 The next most common data transfer is to transfer a trace array from the analyzer Table 2 3 shows the relationship of the two values per point that are transferred to the analyzer When FORM 4 is used each number is sent as a 24 character string each character represented by a digit sign or decimal point Each number is separated from the previous number with a comma Since there are two numbers per point a 201 point transfer in FORM 4 takes 10 050 bytes This form is useful only when input data formatting is difficult with the instrument controller Refer to Table 2 3 for a comparison with the other formats An example of a simple data transfer using FORM 4 ASCII data transfer is shown in this program A fairly common requirement is to create frequency amplitude data pairs from the trace data No frequency information is included with the trace data transfer because the frequency data must be calculated Relating the data fr
145. es and taxes for products returned to Hewlett Packard from another country Hewlett Packard warrants that its software and firmware designated by Hewlett Packard for use with an instrument will execute its programming instructions when properly installed on that instrument Hewlett Packard does not warrant that the operation of the instrument or software or firmware will be uninterrupted or error free LIMITATION OF WARRANTY The foregoing warranty shall not apply to defects resulting from improper or inadequate maintenance by Buyer Buyer supplied software or interfacing unauthorized modification or misuse operation outside of the environmental specifications for the product or improper site preparation or maintenance NO OTHER WARRANTY IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED HEWLETT PACKARD SPECIFICALLY DISCLAIMS THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES THE REMEDIES PROVIDED HEREIN ARE BUYER S SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES HEWLETT PACKARD SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT INDIRECT SPECIAL INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES WHETHER BASED ON CONTRACT TORT OR ANY OTHER LEGAL THEORY Assistance Product maintenance agreements and other customer assistance agreements are available for Hewlett Packard products For any assistance contact your nearest Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Office See the HP 8752C User s Guide for the Hewlett Packard Sales and Service Offices
146. es the syntax error bit When the syntax error bit is set the summary bit in the status byte will be set This will in turn enable an SRQ on bit 5 of the status byte the summary bit for the event status register The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence An I O path is assigned for the analyzer m The system is initialized m The status registers are cleared m The event status register bit 5 is enabled m The status register bit 5 is enabled a The interrupt pointer is enabled and points to a subroutine A bad command is sent to the analyzer to generate an error s The controller reads a serial poll byte from HP IB in the event of an interrupt a The program tests for an SRQ If the SRQ is not generated by the analyzer the subroutine stops and displays SRQ FROM OTHER DEVICE u If the SRQ was generated by the analyzer the program reads the status byte and event status register m If bit 5 in the event status register is set the program prints SYNTAX ERROR FROM ANALYZER m If bit 5 in the event status register is NOT set the program prints SYNTAX ERROR BIT NOT SET HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 41 mw The SRQ interrupt is re enabled on the bus sm At the finish the interrupt is deactivated u The analyzer is released from remote control and the program ends The program is written as follows 10 20 30 40 50 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440
147. es to set the analyzer to the specific operating conditions required for testing The example program will show the limit lines defined but the limits will always fail without additional analyzer setup The program displays the frequency list table as it is entered During editing the displayed table is updated as each line is edited The table is not re ordered At the completion of editing the table is entered into the analyzer and list frequency mode is switched ON During editing simply pressing leaves an entry at the old value The table will be sorted by the analyzer and displayed 2 54 HP BASIC Programming Examples Example 6B Selecting a Single Segment from a Table of Segments Note This program is stored as EXAMP6B on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer This example program demonstrates how to define a single segment as the operating frequency range of the analyzer from a table of segments stored in the controller The program assumes that a list frequency table has already been entered into the analyzer either manually or using the program in Example 6A Setting Up a List Frequency Sweep The program first loads the list frequency table into the computer by reading the start and stop frequencies of each segment and the number of points for each segment The segment s parameters are then displayed on the computer screen and the operator can choose which segment is to
148. esponse Resp amp isolation RFL open RFL short REL load Forward Trans Into user kit CH 1 active CH 2 active MINFID MAXFID COAX WAVE voo o O e m STDD LABS SPECRESPI LI SPECRESI LI SPECSIIAILI SPECS11B L 1 SPECSIIC LI SPECFWDTILI CLAD LABERESP S LABERESI LABESIIAS8 LABES11B 8 LABES11C 5 LABEFWDT LABK KITD SAVEUSEK CHANNEL CHAN CHAN2 1 34 HP IB Programming and Command Reference 0 to 1000 GHz O to 1000 GHz 10 char Std numbers Std numbers Std numbers Std numbers Std numbers Std numbers 10 char 10 char 10 char 10 char 10 char 10 char 10 char Table 1 8 Key Select Codes continued Function Action Mmemonic s 2 o Rg coPY Copy display To printer To plotter x Copy display To plotter OUTPPLOT talker listener To printer OUTPPRIN Printer Auto feed PRNTRAUTF lt ON OFF gt Printer Form feed PRNTRFORF Printer setup Default DEFLPRINT Plotter Auto feed PLTTRAUTF lt ON OFF gt PLTTRFORF Piotter Form feed Plotter setup Default DFLT List values LISV Operating OPEP parameters Print list values Raster display dump to HP 1B8 or operating and marker parameters Next page NEXP Restore display RESD PRIS PRIC Select print color Monochrome Color PCOLDATA 1 lt color gt PCOLDATA2 lt color
149. file in the controller Pressing will begin the transfer from the disk file to internal arrays within the controller and then on to the analyzer J Once completed m The original state will be restored m The analyzer will be sweeping m The analyzer will be calibrated m COR will be displayed on the analyzer s CRT HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 51 Example 6 Limit Line Testing Using List Frequency Mode The analyzer normally takes data points spaced at regular intervals across the overall frequency range of the measurement For example for a 2 GHz frequency span using 201 points data will be taken at intervals of 10 MHz The list frequency mode allows the operator to select the specific points or frequency spacing between points at which measurements are to be made This mode of operation allows flexibility in setting up tests to insure device performance in an efficient manner By only sampling specific points measurement time is reduced since additional time is not spent measuring device performance at frequencies which are of no concern List frequency sweeps are also discussed in the Application and Operation Concepts chapter of the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide These programs emulate operation from the analyzer s front panel when using list sweeps The following two examples illustrate the use of the analyzer s list frequency mode to perform arbitrary frequency testing Example 6A lets the operator construct
150. g Note This program is stored as EXAMP6D on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer The purpose of this example is to demonstrate the use of the limit search fail bits in event status register B to determine whether a device passes the specified limits Limits can be entered manually or using the Example 5A The limit search fail bits are set and latched when limit testing or a marker search fails There are four bits one for each channel for both limit testing and marker search See Figure 1 5 Status Reporting Structure and Table 1 3 Units as a Function of Display Format for additional information Their purpose is to allow the computer to determine whether the test search executed was successful They are used in the following sequence 1 Clear event status register B 2 Trigger the limit test or marker search 3 Check the appropriate fail bit When using limit testing the best way to trigger the limit test is to trigger a single sweep By the time the single sweep command SING finishes limit testing will have occurred Note If the device is tuned during the sweep it may be tuned into and then out of limit causing a limit test to qualify as passed when the device is not in fact within the specified limits When using marker searches max min target and widths outputting marker or bandwidth values automatically triggers any related searches Therefore a
151. g These servicing instructions are for use by qualified personnel only To avoid electrical shock do not perform any servicing unless you are qualified to do so Warning The opening of covers or removal of parts is likely to expose dangerous voltages Disconnect the instrument from all voltage sources while it is being opened Warning The power cord is connected to internal capacitors that may remain live for 10 seconds after disconnecting the plug from its power supply CEEE EST EN a a a Warning For continued protection against fire hazard replace line fuse only with same type and rating F 5A 250V The use of other fuses or material is prohibited How to Use This Guide This guide uses the following conventions Front Panel Ke Screen Text vi This represents a key physically located on the instrument This represents a softkey a key whose label is determined by the instrument s firmware This represents text displayed on the instrument s screen HP 8752C Network Analyzer Documentation Set The Installation and Quick Start Guide familiarizes you with the HP 8752C network analyzer s front and rear panels electrical and environmental operating requirements as well as procedures for installing configuring and verifying the operation of the HP 8752C The User s Guide shows how to make measurements explains commonly used features and tells you how to get the most performance from
152. g and Command Reference Service requests generated when there are error messages or when the instrument is waiting for the Group Execute Trigger GET command are cleared by reading the errors m issuing GET disabling the bits a clearing the status registers Error Output When an error condition is detected in the analyzer an message is generated displayed on the analyzer s display screen and placed in the error queue Error messages consist of an error number followed by an ASCII string no more than 50 characters long The string contains the same message that appears on the analyzer s display The error queue holds up to 20 error messages in the order in which they occur The error messages remain in the error queue until the errors are read by the system controller using the command OUTPERRO The OUTPERRO command outputs one error message Note The error queue can only be cleared by performing an instrument preset or by cycling the lme power In order to keep the queue up to date it is important to read all of the messages out of the queue each time errors are detected HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 27 Calibration Measurement calibration over HP IB follows the same command sequence as a calibration from the front panel 1 Start by selecting a calibration kit such as 50 ohm type N CALKN50 over HP IB 2 Select a calibration type such as reflection 1 port CAL15111 over HP IB CLASS11A ov
153. gers for reading the headers are defined The system is initialized An array is created to hold the learn string a The learn string is requested by the controller a The number of points in the trace is read m The controller allocates an array for the calibration data m The calibration data is read into the controller a The controller creates and assigns a data file for the calibration array and the learn string a The learn string and calibration array are stored in the disk file a The operator presses on the controller to read the calibration data back into the analyzer m The learn string is read from the disk file and output to the analyzer u The calibration array is read in from the disk file and stored in the analyzer HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 49 m The analyzer is returned to continuous sweep mode z The analyzer is released from remote control and the program ends The program is written as follows 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 i This program reads an instrument state and stores it in a disk file The learn string and CAL array are both read into the controller and i then transferred to a disk file for storage The file contents are then restored to the analyzer The analyzer is pre
154. gh 7 softkey 1 being the topmost softkey The STAN command is OPC compatible A command that calls a class is only OPC compatible if that class has only one standard in it If there is more than one standard in a class the coramand that calls the class brings up another menu and there is no need to query it 2 18 HP BASIC Programming Examples del Example 2A Response Measurement Calibration Note This program is stored as EXAMP2A on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer The following program performs a response measurement calibration using the HP 85032B 500 type N calibration kit This program simplifies the calibration by providing explicit directions on the analyzer display while allowing the user to run the program from the controller keyboard More information on selecting calibration standards can be found in the Optimizing Measurement Results chapter of the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence a An I O path is assigned for the analyzer a The system is initialized a The appropriate calibration kit is selected w The softkey menu is deactivated m The response measurement calibration sequence is run a The response measurement calibration data is saved a The softkey menu is activated a The analyzer is released from remote control and the program ends The program is written as follows 10 This progr
155. gt PCOLMEMO lt color gt PCOLMEMO2 lt color gt PCOLGRAT lt color gt PCOLTEXT lt color gt PCOLWARN lt color gt Data channel 1 Data channel 2 Memory channel 1 Print feature color Memory channel 2 Graticule Text Warning Requires pass control mode Colors whitelcyan magentalblue lyellow greenjred black pee HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 35 Table 1 8 Key Select Codes continued Fieston aeon memoni fsf o o Lame Quadrant Left lower Left upper Right lower Right upper Features to be plotted Graticule Text Marker Pen number Data Memory Graticule Text Marker Line type Data Memory Plot scale Full page Graticule to pl p2 Plot speed Slow Fast Dual on off Split on off D2 D1 to D2 Data Memory only Data and mem Data mem Data mem Data to mem On done On warning message Intensity Focus Title COPY continued RIGU FULP PDATA lt ON OFF gt PMEM lt ON OFF gt PGRAT lt ON OFF gt PTEXT lt ONJOFF gt PMKR lt ON OFF gt NN NN NR RF RP Rm PENNDATA D PENNMEMO D PENNGRATID PENNTEXTID PENNMARK D LINTDATA D LINTMEMO D SCAPFULL SCAPGRAT PLOSSLOW PLOSFAST DUAC lt ON OFF gt SPLD lt ON OFF gt DIDIVD2 lt 0N OFF gt DISPDATA DISP MEMO DISPDATM DISPDDM DISPDMM DATI OPC BEEPDONE lt ONIOFF gt BEEPWARN lt ONIOFF gt INTE D FOCUID TITLIS 1 36 HP IB Programming and Com
156. gt 1 60 do sequence 1 60 DOS format 1 62 DOWN 1 60 DTi responds to a group execute trigger 1 9 DUAC 1 60 dual channels 1 60 duplicate sequence 1 60 DUPLSEQ lt X gt SEQ lt Y gt 1 60 E E2 tri state drivers 1 9 edit cal sensor table 1 56 EDITDONE 1 60 edit limit table 1 60 EDITLIML 1 60 EDITLIST 1 60 edit power loss range 1 71 edit power loss table 1 71 edit segment 1 75 ELED D 1 60 EMIB 1 60 emit beep 1 60 end or identify 1 5 end or identify EOI control line 1 7 ENTO 1 61 ENTRY HP IB commands 1 37 entry off 1 61 EOI 1 5 EOI end or identify control line 1 7 Epson P2 1 72 error corrected data 1 21 error correction HP IB commands 1 32 error output 1 27 error reporting 1 24 ESB 1 54 1 61 ESE D 1 54 1 61 ESNBID 1 54 1 61 ESR 1 54 1 61 event status register 1 24 1 26 EXTD 1 61 extended listener capabilities LEO 1 9 external trigger 1 61 EXTMDATA 1 61 EXTMDATO 1 61 EXTMFORM 1 61 EXTMGRAP 1 61 EXTMRAW 1 61 EXTTHIGH 1 49 1 61 EXTTLOW 1 49 1 61 EXTTOFF 1 61 EXTTON 1 61 Index 4 EXTTPOIN 1 61 F Fast Data Transfer Commands 1 22 file names disk 1 29 file titles recall 1 73 firmware revision identification 1 15 FIXE 1 61 fixed load 1 61 fixed marker 1 59 flat line type 1 64 FOCUID 1 61 FORMI 1 54 1 61 FORMI format 1 18 FORM2 1 54 1 61 FORM2 format 1 18 FORMS 1 54 1 61 FORM3 format
157. h data points Freg Startf 1 1 xF inc Calculate frequency of data point PRINT USING 390 1 Freq 1 E 6 Dat I 1 Dat I 2 Print analyzer data NEXT I i OUTPUT Nwa MARKDISC i Discrete marker mode OUTPUT Nwa MARKI 3E 4 Position marker at 30 KHz HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 27 480 490 OUTPUT Nwa OPC WAIT Wait for the analyzer to finish 500 ENTER Nwa Reply Read the 1 when complete 510 LOCAL 7 Release HP IB control 520 530 PRINT 540 PRINT Position the marker with the knob and compare the values 550 560 END Running the Program Run the program and watch the controller console The analyzer will perform an instrument preset The program will then print out the data values received from the analyzer The marker is activated and placed at the left hand edge of the analyzer s display Position the marker with the knob and compare the values read with the active marker with the results printed on the controller console The data points should agree exactly Keep in mind that no matter how many digits are displayed the analyzer is specified to measure m magnitude to a resolution of 0 001 dB n phase to a resolution of 0 01 degrees m group delay to a resolution of 0 01 ps 2 28 HP BASIC Programming Examples Example 3C Data Transfer Using Floating Point Numbers Note This program is stored as EXAMP3C on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer This examp
158. he instrument 2 7 PRIC 1 72 PRINALL 1 72 PRINSEQ lt I gt 1 72 PRINTALL 1 72 print color 1 72 printer address 1 55 auto feed 1 72 form feed 1 72 printer default setup 1 59 printing remote 2 64 2 66 print monochrome 1 72 print sequence 1 72 print softkeys 1 72 PRIS 1 72 PRNTRAUTF 1 72 PRNTRFORF 1 72 PRNTYP540 1 72 PRNTYPDJ 1 72 PRNTYPEP 1 72 PRNTYPLJ 1 72 PRNTYPPJ 1 72 PRNTYPTJ 1 72 processing after taking measurement data 2 11 processing data chain 1 21 process of measuring 2 10 program debugging 2 13 program development features 2 13 program example measurement calibration 2 18 program information 2 13 PSOFT 1 72 PSOFT lt ONI OFF gt 1 49 PTEXT 1 73 PTOS 1 73 purge file 1 73 PURG lt I gt 1 73 PWRLOSS 1 73 PWRR 1 73 Q Q lt I gt 1 73 query command 1 15 querying commands 2 5 query syntax 1 5 queue for output 1 15 R RAID 1 73 RANSOL 1 73 RAIRESP 1 73 raw data include with disk files 1 61 raw measured data 1 21 reading analyzer data 1 15 REAL 1 73 RECA lt T gt 1 73 recall colors 1 73 recall register 1 73 recall sequence 1 65 RECAREG lt I gt 1 73 RECO 1 73 recommended disk drives 2 2 recommended plotters 2 2 recommended printers 2 2 reference line value 1 73 reference position 1 73 set to mkr 1 66 reflection 1 57 REFT 1 73 REFV D 1 73 remote enable REN control line 1 7 remote local capability RLI 1 9 remote mode
159. he marker to the selected point on the trace On a 201 point sweep D can range from 0 to 200 Reports completion of the last OPC compatible command received since OPC or OPC was received Includes the menu keys when printing or plotting the screen Sets up a default state for copy Displays the software revision on the analyzer Selects the learn string revision to input to and output from the analyzer The valid parameters are 0 Defaults to current revision 101 Revision 8752A 1 01 103 Revision 8752A B 1 03 510 Revision 8752C 5 10 520 Revision 8752C 5 20 526 Revision 87520 5 26 530 Revision 8752C 5 30 534 Revision 87520 5 34 538 Revision 87520 5 38 540 Revision 87520 5 40 548 Revision 87520 5 48 612 Revision 8752C 6 12 Always returns a one on the HP 87520 Sets the trigger polarity high Sets the trigger polarity low HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 49 Data Formatted Uncorrected Error coefficient Cal kit Learn string Power trip Averaging Calibration Copy Display Format Marker Meas Marker function Off Save Recall Save Recall Seale Sequence Stimulus System Table 1 9 HP IB Only Commands continued INPUT INPUDATA D INPUFORM D INPURAW1 D INPUCALC lt 01 02 03 gt INPUCALXID INPULEAS D POWT lt ON OFF gt MENUAVG MENUCAL MENUCOPY MENUDISP MENUFORM MENUMARK MENUMEAS MENUMRKF MENU lt ON OFF gt MENURECA MENUSAVE MENUSCAL MENUSEQU MENUST
160. hen when the analyzer completes the sweep the instrument is put into hold mode freezing the data Because single sweep is OPC compatible it is easy to determine when the sweep has been completed The number of groups command NUMGn triggers multiple sweeps It is designed to work the same as single sweep command NUMGn is useful for making a measurement with an averaging factor n n can be 1 to 999 Both the single sweep and number of groups commands restart averaging Step 5 Post Processing the Measurement Data Figure 1 4 shows the process functions used to affect the data after you have made an error corrected measurement These process functions have parameters that can be adjusted to manipulate the error corrected data prior to formatting They do not affect the analyzer s data gathering The most useful functions are trace statistics marker searches electrical delay offset time domain and gating Step 6 Transferring the Measurement Data Read your measurement results All the data output commands are designed to insure that the data transmitted reflects the current state of the instrument Data transfer is also discussed in Example 3 HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 11 BASIC Programming Examples The following sample programs provide the user with factory tested solutions for several remotely controlled analyzer processes The programs can be used in their present state or modified to suit specific needs The programs dis
161. ied stored or put back into the instrument If the data is to be directly stored on to disk it is usually more efficient to use FORM 1 analyzer s internal binary format and to store each coefficient array as it is read in The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence m An I O path is assigned for the analyzer m A binary path is assigned a The system is initialized m The calibration types and number of arrays are defined a The integer variables for reading the headers are defined a The calibration type and number of arrays are read by the controiler m The output is formatted in FORM 3 a The number of points in the trace is read a The memory is allocated for the calibration arrays x Each calibration array is requested from the analyzer m Header information is read with a binary I O path m The elements from each calibration array are read in 2 46 HP BASIC Programming Examples The next calibration array is requested until all the arrays have been read a The calibration type is sent to the analyzer Each calibration array is sent m The calibration is activated m The analyzer is released from remote control and the program ends The program is written as follows 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450
162. ific error coefficient and is stored and transmitted as an error corrected data array Each point is a real imaginary pair and the number of points in the array is the same as the number of points in the trace The five data formats also apply to the transfer of calibration coefficient arrays The Preset State and Memory Allocation chapter in the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide contains information on the storage locations for calibration coefficients and different calibration types A computer can read out the error coefficients using the commands OUTPCALCOI OUTPCALCO2 or OUTPCALCOS Each calibration type uses only as many arrays as required beginning with array 1 Hence it is necessary to know the type of calibration about to be read out attempting to read an array not being used in the current calibration causes the REQUESTED DATA NOT CURRENTLY AVAILABLE warning A computer can also store calibration coefficients in the analyzer To do this declare the type of calibration data about to be stored in the analyzer just as if you were about to perform that calibration Then instead of calling up different classes transfer the calibration coefficients using the INPUCALCnn commands When all the coefficients are stored in the analyzer activate the calibration by issuing the mnemonic SAVC and trigger a sweep on the analyzer This example reads the calibration coefficients into a very large array from which they can be examined modif
163. imag Siemens imag Siemens LIN MKR LOG MKR lin mag real ln mag dB degrees degrees degrees real dB degrees Re im real imag LIN MAG REAL SWR lin mag real The marker readout values are the marker values displayed in the upper right hand corner of the display They also correspond to the value and auxiliary value associated with the fixed marker tvalue 2 is not significant in this format though it is included in data transfers Array Data Formats The analyzer can transmit and receive arrays in the analyzer s internal binary format as well as four different numeric formats The current format is set with the FORM1 FORM2 FORMS FORM4 and FORM5 commands These commands do not affect learn string transfers calibration kit string transfers or non array transfers such as command query or output marker values A transmitted array will be output in the current format and the analyzer will attempt to read incoming arrays according to the current format Each data point in an array is a pair of numbers usually a real imaginary pair The number of data points in each array is the same as the number of points in the current sweep HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 17 The five formats are described below FORM1 FORM2 FORMS FORM4 FORMS The analyzer s internal binary format 6 bytes per data point The array is preceded by a four byte h
164. imit test list Should be preceded by EDITLIML EDITLIST POWLLIST CALFSENA or CALFSENB These commands clear the sequence from the internal registers CLEASEQI Sequence 1 o CLEASEQ2 Sequence 2 a CLEASEQS Sequence 3 E CLEASEQ4 Sequence 4 CLEASEQ5 Sequence 5 CLEASEQ6 Sequence 6 CLES Clears the status register the event status registers and the enable registers CLS Same as CLES l COAX Selects coaxial offsets instead of waveguide while defining a standard during a cal kit modification HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 57 These commands select the indicated display feature for color modification COLOCHID COLOCHIM COLOCH2D COLOCH2M COLOGRAT COLOTEXT COLOWARN COLOR D CONS CONT Channel 1 data and limit lines Channel 1 memory Channel 2 data and limit lines Channel 2 memory Graticule Text Warning Adjusts the color saturation for the selected display feature Continues the paused sequence Continuous sweep trigger mode These commands convert the S parameter data to CONVIDS CONVOFF CONVYREF CONVYTRA CONVZREF CONVZTRA COPYFRFT COPYFRRT CORI lt ON OFF gt CORR lt ON OFF gt COUC lt ON OFF gt COUP lt ON OFF gt CWFREQ D CWTIME DIDIVD2 lt ON OFF gt DATI DEBU lt ON OFF gt DECRLOOC Inverted S parameters Conversion OFF Y reflection Y transmission Z reflection Z transmission Copies the file titles into the register titles Copy save recall regis
165. in five different formats The type of format affects what kind of data array is declared real or integer because the format determines what type of data is transferred Programming examples of data transfers using different formats are discussed in Example 3 Measurement Data Transfer located in Chapter 2 For information on the various types of data that can be obtained raw data error corrected data etc see Data Levels located later in this chapter For information on transferring trace data by selected points see Limit Line and Data Point Special Functions located in Chapter 2 A A A A ere Note Example 7C Reading ASCII Disk Files to the System Controller Disk File located in Chapter 2 explains how to access disk files from a computer Stimulus Related Values Frequency related values are calculated for the analyzer display The start and stop frequencies or center and span frequencies of the selected frequency range are available to the programmer In a linear frequency range the frequency values can be easily calculated because the trace data points are equally spaced across the trace Relating the data from a linear frequency sweep to frequency can be done by querying the start frequency the frequency span and the number of points in the trace Given that information the frequency of point n in a linear frequency sweep is represented by the equation F Start frequency n 1 x Span Point
166. initialized w The integer variables for the header information are defined m The string variable for the header is defined a The selected frequency span is swept once a The internal binary format is selected m The error corrected data is output from the analyzer The two data header characters and the two length bytes are read in The string buffer is allocated for data a The trace data is read into the string buffer m The analyzer is restored to continuous sweep mode and queried for command completion m The instrument is returned to local control and the program ends The program is written as follows 10 This program is an example of a form 1 internal format data t 20 transfer The data is stored in a string dimensioned to the 30 length of the data being transferred i 40 50 EXAMP3E 50 70 ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 Assign an 1 0 path for the analyzer 80 ASSIGN Nwa_bin TO 716 FORMAT OFF i Binary path for data transfer 90 100 CLEAR SCREEN 110 Initialize the analyzer 120 ABORT 7 t Send IFC Interface Clear 130 CLEAR ONwa SDC Selective Device Clear 140 OUTPUT Nwa OPC PRES i Preset the analyzer and wait 150 ENTER ONwa Reply Read the 1 when completed 160 170 INTEGER Length Header length 2 bytes 180 DIM Header 2 Header string 2 bytes 190 HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 35 200 OUTPUT GNwa DPC SING Single sweep and wait 210 ENTER CNwa Reply Read the 1 when completed 220 230 OU
167. ipheral addresses 1 12 PGRAT 1 71 PHAO D 1 71 PHAS 1 71 phase 1 71 phase offset 1 71 PLOS 1 71 PLOT 1 71 plot data 1 70 plot graticule 1 71 plot markers 1 71 plot memory 1 71 plot quadrant 1 64 1 74 plot scale 1 74 plot softkeys 1 72 plot speed 1 71 plot string output 1 69 plotter address 1 55 auto feed 1 71 form feed 1 71 plotter default setup 1 59 plotter port disk 1 71 HP IB 1 71 plotter type 1 71 plot text 1 73 plot to disk title 1 79 PLTPRTDISK 1 71 PLTPRTHPIB 1 71 PLITRAUTF 1 71 PLITRFORF 1 71 PLITYPHPGL 1 71 PLITYPPLIR 1 71 PMEM 1 71 PMKR 1 71 PMTRTTIT 1 71 POIN D 1 71 points specify 1 71 POLA 1 71 polar 1 71 polar markers 1 71 POLMLIN 1 71 POLMLOG 1 71 POLMRI 1 71 PORE 1 71 PORTI D 1 71 PORT2 D 1 71 port extensions 1 71 PORTRID 1 71 PORTTID 1 71 POWEID 1 71 power level 1 71 power loss range edit 1 71 power loss table 1 73 edit 1 71 power meter address 1 55 power meter cal factor 1 56 power meter into title string 1 71 power meter type 1 72 power ranges 1 72 power slope 1 76 power sweep 1 72 power trip 1 72 POWLFREQID 1 71 POWLLIST 1 71 POWLLOSS D 1 71 POWM 1 72 POWS 1 72 POWT 1 72 POWT lt ON OFF gt 1 50 PPO does not respond to parallel poll 1 9 PRAN 1 72 PRIC 1 72 PRINALL 1 72 PRINSEQ lt I gt 1 72 PRINTALL 1 72 print color 1 72 printer address 1 55 auto feed 1 72 form feed 1 7
168. is accessed and the records read from the file and printed on the controller display to observe the actual file contents The file pointer is reset and the records are then read and interpreted for their data contents The first six records are skipped for this example The seventh record contains the stimulus frequency values and the number of points in the trace These values are read from the record The frequency increment or point spacing is calculated and used later in the frequency data calculations for a point Two more records are skipped and the next is the first record representing data values The data values are read in a loop until the values for the number of points have been recovered from the file The data values are tabulated and printed out on the controller display The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence m An I O path is assigned to the analyzer E The system is initialized E A string is dimensioned to hold a file record a The analyzer operating state is set a The external drive is selected for storage only ASCII data is stored a A file name is entered and the data stored into it a The operator is prompted to move the disk to the controller disk drive a The disk file is read and the contents displayed s The file pointer is rewound m The file contents are converted to trace data a The frequency and complex data pair is displayed for each point a The analyzer is restored to conti
169. is active With that information it predicts how many arrays to read out When all the arrays have been sent to the computer the program prompts the user The operator then turns the calibration OFF or performs a completely different calibration on the analyzer and continues the program The computer reloads the old calibration The operator should not preset the analyzer because the instrument settings must be the same as those that were present when the calibration was taken Note The re transmitted calibration is associated with the current instrument state the instrument has no way of knowing the original state associated with the calibration data For this reason it is recommended that the learn string be used to store the instrument state whenever calibration data is stored The next example demonstrates how to reload the analyzer state with both the learn string and the calibration arrays 2 48 HP BASIC Programming Examples Example 5C Saving and Restoring the Analyzer Instrument State Note This program is stored as EXAMPSC on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer Note The instrument state may also be stored in the analyzer s internal registers This is the fastest and most efficient method for toggling between instrument states This example is for use when the analyzer s internal memory is full or when the are other internal memory limitations This example demonstrates h
170. is not For example press MEAS Though there are seven options on the measurement menu only one is underlined at a time The underlined option will return a one 1 when queried For instance rewrite line 10 as 10 OUTPUT 716 DUAC Run the program once and note the result Then press the display mode and run the program again Another example is to rewrite line 10 as 10 OUTPUT 716 PHAS In this case the program will display a one 1 if phase is currently being displayed Since the command only applies to the active channel the response to the PHAS inquiry depends on which channel is active 2 6 HP BASIC Programming Examples Operation Complete Occasionally there is a need to query the analyzer as to when certain analyzer operations have completed For instance a program should not have the operator connect the next calibration standard while the analyzer is still measuring the current one To provide such information the analyzer has an operation complete reporting mechanism or OPC command that will indicate when certain key commands have completed operation The mechanism is activated by sending either OPC or OPC immediately before an OPC compatible command When the command completes execution bit 0 of the event status register will be set If OPC was queried with OPC the analyzer will also output a one 1 when the command completes execution As an example type SCRATCH and press RETURN Type ED
171. is used in combination with several functions such as PENNDATA PENNMEMO The code naming guidelines listed in Table 1 1 are used in order to a make commands more meaningful and easier to remember a maintain compatibility with other products including the HP 8510 Note There are times when these guidelines are not followed due to technical considerations Table i 1 Code Naming Convention For HP IB Code Use Example Power First Four Letters Start Electrical Delay First Three Letters of First Word First Letter BLED of Second Word Search Right SEAR Two Words in a Group Marker Center Four Letters of Both MARKCENT Gate Span GATESPAN Three Words Cal Kit N 50 Q First Three Letters of First Word First Letter CALKN50 of Second Word First Four Letters of Third Word Pen Num Data Some codes require appendages ON OFF 1 2 etc Codes that do not have a front panel equivalent are HP IB only commands They use a similar convention based on the common name of the function HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 3 Valid Characters The analyzer accepts the following ASCII characters w letters numbers s decimal points a a semicolons a quotation marks a carriage returns CR a linefeeds LF Both upper and lower case letters are acceptable Carriage returns leading zeros spaces and unnecessary terminators are ignored except for those within a command or appendage If
172. ith most computing controllers and instruments the handshake is performed automatically making it transparent to the programmer Control Lines The data bus also has five control lines The controller uses these lines to address devices and to send bus commands IFC Interface Clear This line is used exclusively by the system controller When this line is true low all devices whether addressed or not unaddress and revert to an idle state HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 7 ATN Attention SRQ Service Request REN Remote Enable EOI End or Identify HP IB Requirements The active controller uses this line to define whether the information on the data bus is command oriented or data oriented When this line is true low the bus is in the command mode and the data lines carry bus commands When this line is false high the bus is in the data mode and the data lines carry device dependent instructions or data This line is set true low when a device requests service and the active controller services the requesting device The network analyzer can be enabled to pull the SRQ line for a variety of reasons such as requesting control of the interface for the purposes of printing plotting or accessing a disk This line is used exclusively by the system controller When this line is set true low the bus is in the remote mode and devices are addressed by the controller to either listen or talk When
173. ith the number of points in the trace set to 11 This makes it very difficult to compute the frequency point spacing in the trace The points are equally spaced across the trace but not equally spaced in relation to frequency because the frequency span is displayed in a logarithmic scale as opposed to a linear scale The limit test data array may be read from the analyzer to provide the frequency values for each data point All four values per trace location must be read from the analyzer The test results and limit values are not used in this example Only the frequency values are used This technique is the only method of obtaining the non linear frequency data from the analyzer s display The test data and frequencies are printed on the controller display and the marker enabled to allow the operator to examine the actual locations on the analyzer s display The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence a An I O path is assigned for the analyzer m The system is initialized m The integer variables for the header information are defined m The number of points in the trace is set to 11 m The frequency span 10 MHz to 200 MHz is selected mw The log frequency sweep is selected m The data transfer format 3 is set m The headers are read from the trace a The array size is calculated and allocated a The trace data is read in m The limit test array is calculated and allocated The limit line test arra
174. ker be dae he ce et Se we ee Se ee te os OG ga we Be ae 1 6 Listener 66 4 Gi ye ak SR inde Mena pi So dd Wer ORL BENS Pea SE hs 1 6 Controller gt se el s eoa e i GE CAR sa eH A E ae ee ee 1 6 HP IB Bus Structure Mf Se O DO Soca qa dae o Se l 1 7 Data Bus a Se 3 sae E Bd O e pA a cen Se Se a 1 7 Handshake Lines y o e ew we a a Bw ee 1 7 Control Lines pd de BENE bs cre ds Ps A ver Me Se de Ge 1 7 HP IB Requirements Ls sue wee we ok A A ee Re 1 8 ee HP IB Operational Capabilities ee 1 9 HP IB Status Indicators alo e pecs as a A Wie Ge 1 10 Bus Device Modes a s 0 coa ca Da opo dl a Ge he A A 1 10 System Gontroller Mode 2 acumula e e ew 1 11 Talker Listener Mode e o a a TA e 1 11 Pass Control Mode LA poh Ute eds de hk cae HE a to Seca OD 1 11 Analyzer Bus Modes 4 6 e e A A ada 1 11 Setting HP IB Addresses es e o ne aE A ee LD 1 12 Response to HP IB Meta Messages IEEE 488 Universal Commands 1 12 ADOF a ar ede Ee we SAS See we ere a e Be da ed 1 12 Device Clear ete ce tks ees DO de ud athe a do We A Saket Bele e E 1 12 Local quero has a il Ss coca Ge Gee A RA G 1 12 Local Lockout Sa hw Oo Pe KAAS RA we Oe me RA DE 1 13 Parallel Po ore Fa DS ae SP RS UE do Ae SS SG bog ee Se Se nts Ei 1 13 Pass CONTO s e sieren a OE De Be STA Me A a eS 1 13 Remote A A A sp Ne late Si DR Sty does pes Ake cae 1 13 Serial Poll 2 wow ia a
175. knob turn as a 1 Note 3 If the two byte integer sent back from KOR is negative it is a knob count If the knob count was negative no modification is needed If the knob count was positive however bit 14 will not be set In this case the number must be decoded by clearing the most significant byte as by AND ing the integer with 255 130 HPAB Programming and Command Reference Key Select Codes Arranged by Front Panel Hardkey The HP IB mnemonics in this table are functionally arranged by their front panel key equivalent in the order shown Keys AVG CAL Error correction calibration CAL Calibration kits CHANNEL COPY DISPLAY ENTRY FORMAT LOCAL MEAS MENU stimulus MARKER MARKER FCTN SAVE RECALL Internal registers SAVE RECALL Disk files SCALE REF SEQ Sequencing STIMULUS SYSTEM SYSTEM Limit testing SYSTEM Transform Column headings Function The front panel function affected by the mnemonic Action The effects of the mnemonic on that function Mnemonic The HP IB mnemonic S Syntax type See Input Syntax Query response If a response is defined it is listed O OPC compatible command Range The range of acceptable inputs and corresponding units Symbol conventions An optional operand D A numerical operand 1 An integer appendage that is part of the command For example CLEA lt I gt where I 1 to 5 indicates that the actual commands are CLEA1 CLEA2 CLEA3 CLEA4 and CLEAS
176. l Equipment 500 type N calibration RE sas ss been teetees ura x rarte HP 85032B Test port return cables cccscc ics cess cease cesewes s ias at o HP 11852D PIG Gish cn fie condi sd AA aro a E sia asa HP 7440A ColorPro PINOy asees ao a a A A eae SA AD HP 2225A Thinkjet Diskdrive LA Se ahs ESA Renee san Susie HP 9122 or HP 9153 CS80 See the Compatible Peripherals chapter in the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide for a more complete list of compatible peripherals System Setup and HP IB Verification This section describes how to a Connect the test system m Set the test system addresses m Set the network analyzer s control mode a Verify the operation of the system s interface bus HP IB HP 9000 SERIES 300 CONTROLLER HP 87520 REAR PANEL Is cope o d M os mo OOO H ch82c Figure 2 1 The HP 8752C Network Analyzer System with Controller 2 2 HP BASIC Programming Examples Connect the analyzer to the computer with an HP IB cable as shown in Figure 2 1 Switch on the computer Load the BASIC 6 2 operating system Hp GO DO pa Switch on the analyzer a To verify the analyzer s address press The analyzer has only one HP IB interface though it occupies two addresses one for the instrument and one for the display The display address is equal to the instrument address with the least significant bit incremented The display address is automatically set each time the instrument address is
177. l Equipment ci as OR dr A ese AE o A RA 2 2 System Setup and HP IB Verification a 020 08 2 2 HP 8752C Network Analyzer Instrument Control Using BASIC lc 2 4 Command Structure in BASIC is meigo amp Ge A VEL E NL E AVE A 2 4 Command Query LA AS A E Ea ee A E De we Be 2 5 Running the Program a Slane o dE ED ELE E O ee RES Ge CRE 8 2 6 Operation Complete 2 ae ee ago Vo ee es ee 2 7 Running the Program saca GS dos ews en ah DS ee HO da 2 7 Preparing for Remote HP IB Control 022022 2 7 DO Patas te eee a eo ee Ba Se Srp be ase aie er So ces Se de a 2 8 Measurement Process dt AAA eee ene EA BA Sb 2 10 Step 1 Setting Up the Instrument 200 2 2 22 248 2 10 Step 2 Calibrating the Test Setup 2 258 722 204 2 10 Step 3 Connecting the Device under Test 2 2 2 0 2 10 Step 4 Taking the Measurement Data ee 2 11 Step 5 Post Processing the Measurement Data 2 11 Step 6 Transferring the Measurement Data 22 2 11 BASIC Programming Examples ee rr e 2 12 Program Information So at eo ee sy ds Sogo DO A RAN ae ce RS A 2 13 Analyzer Features Helpful in Developing Programming Routines 2 13 Analyzer Debug Mode E e ase A Be e da See 2 13 User Controllable Sweep 2 13 Example 1 Measurement Setup ee 2 2 14 Example 1A Setting
178. l Ge HP IB Operational Capabilities Gaia see Me Se no Be oi Se ces tt os HP IB Status Indicators Ele de cet eon ae Bus Device Modes 00 Be Si e amp Be ie Se ate Y System Controller Mode 2 5 2 5 2 ee eee Talker Listener Mode cc clic gg odio FR sia Pass Control Mode ies 24 spams em Bowes Scat Gc hese og tp Analyzer Bus Modes 006 RE enn 28 wash ais a Setting HP IB Addresses 4 5 601 2 esse e Response to HP IB Meta a IEEE 488 Universal Commands de do Y o A Ge ee eee UR ty ees oe LD eA Sk ES es ee Device Clears elo woe GW ee OAS EE AS ks Bie Sit dale at dered Bos N Local des See JOR de eh ae le don ae Ae Bote de Se Ost eae Pook eas Local Lockout o E a E Se SG A Ea E Parallel Pol 2 E 4 we a Ee Ee ae ee eee Laon are a Fass Controls a el He le BR Bw Be wen Ge aig TR ee a Remote sige e PAE as He ht wate ake o de Serial POM m de a AAN BD AER Es Trigger A o inda ppt E aks GE ARS A PE Analyzer Operation oao a e 4 EA A E Operation Complete EA aed Reading Analyzer Data a A A A Q tp t Quete ee y s a e E a E AA A E Command Query Se a ad aa RS a ete eG EEE E fdentiR ation 2 Go eui e AE O O uy TD ANE HS q O He GIT DUE Syntax a E da n o SUE ee ee A Marker dato ie a AG a E O NS A RA C Array Data Formats x pos pp EG e ph RR Se LA ee ae tmn A hh A Co t t
179. le program illustrates data transfer using FORM 3 in which data is transmitted in the floating point formats FORM 2 is nearly identical except for the IEEE 32 bit format of 4 bytes per value FORM 5 reverses the order of the bytes to conform with the PC conventions for defining a real number The block data formats have a four byte header The first two bytes are the ASCII characters HA that indicate that a fixed length block transfer follows and the next two bytes form an integer containing the number of bytes in the block to follow The header must be read in so that data order is maintained This transfer is more than twice as fast than a FORM 4 transfer With the FORM 4 transfer 10 050 bytes are sent 201 points x 2 values per point x 24 bytes per value Using FORM 2 to transfer the data only 1612 bytes are sent 201 points x 2 values per point x 4 bytes per value See Array Data Formats The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence a An I O path is assigned for the analyzer m The system is initialized w The integer variables are defined to contain the header information a The number of points in the trace is set to 11 a The selected frequency span is swept once u Data transfer format 3 is set e The headers are read from the trace m The array size is calculated and allocated u The trace data is read in and printed a The marker is activated and placed at 30 kHz u The instrument is ret
180. learing the input command buffer 2 7 clear sequence 2 7 command structure 2 4 command structure elements 2 4 appendage 2 4 BASIC command statement 2 4 data 2 4 terminators 2 4 unit 2 4 compatible peripherals 2 2 connecting the device under test 2 10 connecting the test system 2 2 CONSTANTS 2 83 controlled sweep 2 13 correction of errors example program 2 18 D data formats and transfers 2 23 data taking 2 11 data transfer 2 11 2 23 to a plotter 2 69 using floating point numbers 2 29 using FORM 1 2 35 using FORM 4 2 26 using frequency array information 2 32 using markers 2 24 debug mode 2 5 2 13 developing program features 2 13 device connection 2 10 E equipment optional 2 2 required 2 1 error correction example program 2 18 error queue 2 38 event status register B 2 61 event status registers 2 37 example measurement calibration 2 18 F features helpful in developing programming routines 2 13 formats and transfers of trace data 2 23 frequency calculation equation 2 26 H helpful features for developing programs 2 13 HP 9000 Series 300 computer 2 1 HP IB interconnect cables 2 1 I information on programs 2 13 input output path 2 8 instrument setup 2 10 instrument states 2 44 recalling 2 44 2 49 saving 2 44 2 49 Index 1 interrupts generating 2 41 K kits of calibration standards 2 18 L limit line and data point special functions 2 7
181. lect the condition of the summarized queue or register The status byte can be read by a serial poll or by using the command OUTPSTAT When using this command the sequencing bit can be set by the operator during the execution of a test sequence OUTPSTAT does not automatically put the instrument in remote mode thus giving the operator access to the analyzer front panel functions The status byte m summarizes the error queue E summarizes two event status registers that monitor specific conditions inside the instrument contains a bit that is set when the instrument is issuing a service request SRQ over HP IB m contains a bit that is set when the analyzer has data to transmit over HP IB Any bit in the status byte can be selectively enabled to generate a service request SRQ when set Setting a bit in the service request enable register with the SREnn executable enables the corresponding bit in the status byte The units variable nn represents the binary equivalent of the bit in the status byte For example SRE24 enables status byte bits 3 and 4 since 2 2 24 and disables all the other bits SRE will not affect the state of the status register bits The status byte also summarizes two queues the output queue and the error queue The error queue is described in the next section When the analyzer outputs information it puts the information in the output queue where it resides until the controller reads it The output queue is only
182. lected device trigger SDT This means that it will not respond to group execute trigger GET unless it is addressed to listen The analyzer will not respond to GET if it is not in hold mode HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 13 Analyzer Operation Operation Complete Occasionally there is a need to know when certain analyzer operations have been completed There is an operation complete function OPC that allows a synchronization of programs with the execution of certain key commands This mechanism is activated by issuing OPC or 0PC prior to an OPC compatible command The status byte or ESR operation complete bit will then be set after the execution of the OPC compatible command For example issuing OPC SING causes the OPC bit to be set when the single sweep is finished Issuing OPC in place of the OPC causes the analyzer to output a one 1 when the command execution is complete The analyzer will halt the computer by not transmitting the one 1 until the command has completed For example executing OPC PRES and then immediately querying the analyzer causes the bus to halt until the instrument preset is complete and the analyzer outputs a one 1 As another example consider the timing of sweep completion Send the command string SWET 3 S 0PC SING to the analyzer This string sets the analyzer sweep time to 3 seconds and then waits for completion of a single sweep to respond with a one 1 The computer should be
183. led task is completed the analyzer returns control to the system controller Note Performing an instrument preset does not affect the selected bus mode although the bus mode will return to talker listener mode if the line power is cycled Note Specifications and Measurement Uncertainties in the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide provides information on setting the correct bus mode from the front panel menu Analyzer Bus Modes As discussed earlier under HP IB control the analyzer can operate in one of three modes talker listener pass control or system controller mode In talker listener mode the analyzer behaves as a simple device on the bus While in this mode the analyzer can make a plot or print using the OUTPPLOT or CUTPPRIN commands The analyzer will wait until it is addressed to talk by the system controller and then dump the display to a plotter printer that the system controller has addressed to listen Use of the commands PLOT and PRINALL require control to be passed to another controller HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 11 In pass control mode the analyzer can request control from the system controller and take control of the bus if the controller addresses it to take control This allows the analyzer to take control of printers plotters and disk drives on an as needed basis The analyzer sets event status register bit 1 when it needs control of the interface and the analyzer will
184. list values Status byte Display title Max values Min values Min max values Min max value OUTPLIMM OUTPMARK OUTPMEMO OUTPMEMF OUTPMSTA OUTPMWIL OUTPOPTS OUTPPRNALL OUTPRAW I OUTPRAF lt I gt OUTPSTAT OUTPTITL OUTPAMAX OUTPAMIN QUTPSEGAM OUTPSEGM Outputs the limit test results as described for OUTPLIML at the marker Outputs the active marker values in 3 numbers The first two numbers are the marker values and the last is the stimulus value See Table 1 3 for the marker values Outputs the memory trace from the active channel It is error corrected data in real imaginary pairs and can be treated the same as data from OUTPDATA Fast data transfer command for OUTPMEMO Outputs marker statistics mean standard deviation and peak to peak deviation ASCII format Outputs results of bandwidth search bandwidth center and Q ASCII format Same operation as OUTPMWID plus the loss value Outputs an ASCII string of the options installed Prints all list values or operating and marker parameters in text mode to HP IB Requires pass control mode Outputs uncorrected data array for the active channel Fast data transfer command for OUTPRAW lt I gt Outputs the status byte ASCII format Outputs the display title ASCH format Outputs max values for all limit line segments Outputs min values for all limit line segments Outputs limit test min max all segs Outputs th
185. ll that is required is to check the fail bit after reading the data In this example several consecutive sweeps must qualify as passing in order to insure that the limit test pass was not extraneous due to the device settling or operator tuning during the sweep Upon running the program the number of passed sweeps for qualification is entered For very slow sweeps a small number of sweeps such as two are appropriate For relatively fast sweeps where the device requires time to settle after tuning as many as six or more sweeps may be more appropriate A limit test table can be entered over HP IB The sequence is very similar to that used in entering a list frequency table as shown in Example 5D The manual front panel entry sequence is closely followed The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence m An I O path is assigned for the analyzer m The system is initialized e The pass counter is initialized on entry m The analyzer takes a sweep HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 61 a The event status register B byte is output and the channel 1 limit is tested If the device fails the first sweep the operator is prompted to insure it is tuned correctly and the device is measured again If the device passes the first sweep the operator is prompted not to touch the device as testing continues If the device passes the required number of sweeps the operator is prompted that the device has pas
186. lly low high pulse at end of sweep TTL normally high low pulse at end of sweep Increments the value in the active entry area up key Puts the analyzer in pass control mode These commands select the sensor input being used with the HP 438A power meter For the HP 436A or 437B the A sensor is always used USESENSA USESENSB VELOFACT D WAIT WAVD WAVE WIDT lt ON OFF gt WIDV D Sensor A Sensor B Enters the velocity factor of the transmission medium Waits for a clean sweep OPC compatible Selects waveguide electrical delay See also COAD Specifies a waveguide standard while defining a standard as part of a cal kit modification Turns the bandwidth search ON and OFF Enters the widths search parameter These commands set the window for the transform Option 010 time domain WINDMAXI WINDMINI WINDNORM WINDOW D WINDUSEM lt ON OFF gt Maximum Minimum Normal Enters arbitrary window Turns the trace memory ON as the window shape These commands enter new softkey labels into the indicated softkey positions WRSK1 WRSK2 5 WRSK3 5 WRSK4 WRSK5 WRSK6 WRSK7 WRSK8 5 Softkey 1 Softkey 2 Softkey 3 Softkey 4 Softkey 5 Softkey 6 Softkey 7 Softkey 8 1 89 HP IB Programming and Command Reference Index ES NS NE REINO ESA TT TIC A O SERGE Special characters 1 31 A A B 1 55 AB 1 55 abort message IFC 1 12 ADDRCONT D 1 55 ADDRDIS
187. ls information 1 2 IEEE standard digital interface information 1 2 IF bandwidth 1 62 IFBIHIGH 1 62 IFBILOW 1 62 IFBW D 1 62 IFC abort message 1 12 IFC interface clear control line 1 7 IFLCEQZESEQ lt I gt 1 62 IFLCNEZESEQ lt I gt 1 62 IFLTFAILSEQ lt I gt 1 62 IFLTPASSSEQ lt I gt 1 62 IMAG 1 62 imaginary 1 62 increment loop counter 1 63 INCRLOOC 1 63 information on programs 2 13 INID 1 63 INTE 1 63 INPUCALC lt I gt 1 50 INPUCALC lt D D 1 63 INPUCALK D 1 50 1 63 INPUDATA D 1 50 1 63 INPUFORM D 1 50 1 63 INPULEAS D 1 50 1 63 INPURAW lt I gt 1 63 INPURAW lt I gt D 1 50 input output path 2 8 instrument setup 2 10 instrument states 2 44 recalling 2 44 2 49 saving 2 44 2 49 instrument state summary 1 23 INTE D 1 63 intensity background 1 55 interface addresses 1 12 interface clear IFC control line 1 7 interface functions controller 1 6 listener 1 6 talker 1 6 interpolative correction 1 58 interrupts generating 2 41 INTM 1 63 ISOD 1 63 index 6 K key codes 1 30 KEY D 1 49 1 63 key select codes 1 31 KITD 1 63 kit done 1 63 kits of calibration standards 2 18 KOR 1 49 L LABEFWDT 1 64 label cal kit 1 64 label class 1 64 label standard 1 64 LABERESI 1 64 LABERESP 1 64 LABESI1A 1 64 LABESI1B 1 64 LABES11C 1 64 LABKI 1 64 LABS S 1 64 LaserJet 1 72 LEO no extended listener capabilities
188. lt I gt SAVE RECALL internal registers l te 5 01 TO 32 ito5 Gi to 32 i to 01 to 32 j to 5 10 char 01 to 32 10 char 01 to 32 10 char l to 5 ito5 1 to 5 10 char EXTMDATA lt ON OFF gt EXTMRAW lt ON OFF gt EXTMFORM lt ON OFF gt EXTMGRAP lt ON OFF gt EXTMDATO lt ON OFF gt SAVUASCI SAVUBINA FORMATDOS FORMATLIF 8 to 8192 Requires pass control mode HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 43 Table 1 8 Key Select Codes continued Function Action Mmemonie Ss o range SCALE REF Auto 1 Value 3 1D Amplitude range Reference Position 38 ID 0 lt D lt 10 Value 3 D Amplitude range Set to mkr 1 Set delay 3 D Set to mkr 1 Waveguide delay 1 Offset 3 iD SEQ sequencing Sequencing menu Continue sequence CONS 1 Do sequence DOSEQ lt I gt 2 lio8 Gosub sequence GOSUB 1 New modify sequence NEWSEQ lt I gt 2 ito6 Pause to select seq PTOS 1 Done modify DONM 1 Select sequence SEQ lt I gt 2 1to 6 Q lt I gt 2 lto 6 TTL low end sweep high TTLHPULS TTL high end sweep low TTLLPULS Programs all TTL output bits PARAOUT D Oto 15 Set specified bit on TTL SETBIT D Oto 3 Clear specified bit on TTL CLEABITID Oto 3 Input TTL bit high do IFBIHIGH SEQ lt I gt Input TTL bit low do IFBILOW SEQ lt I gt Save recall Store to disk STORSEQ lt I gt 1 to 6 sequences Recall from disk LOA
189. lt ON OFF gt DUPLSEQ X SEQ Y EDITDONE EDITLIML EDITLIST ELED D Data only Data and memory Data divided by memory linear division log subtraction Data minus memory linear subtraction Memory only Same as DISPDDM Done with a class of standards during a calibration Only needed when multiple standards are measured to complete the class Done modifying a test sequence Begin execution of the selected sequence Decrements the value in the active entry area down key Dual channel display ON or OFF Duplicates sequence X to sequence Y Done editing list frequency or limit table Begin editing limit table Begin editing list frequency table Sets the electrical delay offset 1 50 HP IB Programming and Command Reference EMIB Sends out a beep during a sequence NEWSEQ lt I gt must precede to ensure that a sequence is currently being created or modified ENTO Turns the active entry area OFF ESB Outputs event status register B ESE D Enables the selected event status register bits to be summarized by bit 5 in the status byte An event status register bit is enabled when the corresponding bit in the operand D is set ESNB D Enables the selected event status register B bits to be summarized by bit 2 of the status byte Much like ESE ESR Outputs the value of the event status register EXTD Selects the external disk as the active storage device Used with STORSEQ lt I gt TITF lt I gt and PURG lt
190. mand The analyzer does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters For example execute OUTPUT 716 auto Note The analyzer also has a debug mode to aid in troubleshooting systems When the debug mode is ON the analyzer scrolls incoming HP IB commands y To manually activate the debug mode press To deactivate the debug mode from the controller execute OUTPUT 716 DEBUOFF Command Query Suppose the operator has changed the power level from the front panel The computer can find the new power level using the analyzer s command query function If a question mark is appended to the root of a command the analyzer will output the value of that function For instance POWE 7 DB sets the analyzer s output power to 7 dB and POWE outputs the current RF output power at the test port to the system controller For example Type SCRATCH and press to clear old programs Type EDIT and press to access the edit mode HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 5 Then type in 10 OUTPUT 716 POWE 20 ENTER 716 Reply 30 DISP Reply 40 END Running the Program The computer will display the source power level in dBm O dBm Change the power level by pressing program again set source power level is DO ED Now run the When the analyzer receives POWE it prepares to transmit the current RF source power level The BASIC statement ENTER 716 allows the analyzer to transmit information to the computer by add
191. mand Reference Table 1 8 Key Select Codes continued Function Action Mmemome s 2 o Range DISPLAY continued Frequency notation BACHD SVCO RECO DEFC Adjust display Background intensity Save colors Recall colors Default colors COLOCHID COLOCHIM COLOCH2D COLOCH2M COLOGRAT COLOTEXT COLOWARN Ch 1 data lim in Ch i memory Ch 2 data lim In Ch 2 memory Graticule Text Warning Modify colors 0 to 100 0 to 100 O to 100 CBRI D COLOR D TINTID Adjust color Brightness Color Tint Reset Format Log mag Phase Delay Smith chart Polar Lin mag Real Imaginary SWR pei p op E SR o o a HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 37 Table 1 8 Key Select Codes continued __ Function action Mnemonic s o Range HP IB modes Debug Disk drive HP IB addresses Power meter Plotter type Printer type Plotter port Reflection Transmission Input ports Talker listener Use pass contro Display commands Unit Volume Plotter Printer Disk drive Controller Address Type Plotter HPGL printer ThinkJet DeskJet DeskJet LaserJet PaintJet Epson P2 HP IB Disk LOCAL TALKLIST USEPASC DEBU lt ON OFF gt DISCUNIT D DISCVOLU D ADDRPLOTID ADDRPRIN D ADDRDISCID ADDRCONT D ADDRPOWMID POWM lt ON OFF gt PLITYPPLIR PLITYPHPGL PRNTYP
192. mber is 0 E 280 OUTPUT CNwa OUTPERRO Request error queue contents 290 ENTER Nwa Err Error Read error number and string 300 PRINT Err Error Print error messages 310 UNTIL Err 0 No more errors in queue 320 330 LOCAL Nwa Release analyzer from remote 340 BEEP 600 2 i Beep to attract attention 350 END LOOP Repeat error search 360 370 END Running the Program Run the program The analyzer goes through the preset cycle Nothing will happen at first The program is waiting for an error condition to activate the error queue To cause an error press a blank softkey The message CAUTION INVALID KEY will appear on the analyzer The computer will beep and print out two error messages The first line will be the invalid key error message and the second line will be the NO ERRORS message To clear the error queue you can either loop until the NO ERRORS message is received or wait until the bit in the status register is cleared In this case we wait until the status bit in the status register is clear Note that while the program is running the analyzer remains in the local mode and the front panel keys may be accessed The error queue will hold up to 20 errors until all the errors are read out or the instrument is preset It is important to clear the error queue whenever errors are detected Otherwise old errors may be mistakenly associated with the current instrument state Press the key HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 39
193. me than data collection i EXAMP7B I ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 Assign an 1 0 path for the analyzer ASSIGN Pit TO 705 Assign an 1 0 path for the plotter CLEAR SCREEN Initialize the analyzer without peono to preserve data ABORT 7 Generate an IFC Interface Clear CLEAR Nwa SDC Selected Device Clear 1 DIM Plot 32000 Define string for plotter commands I OUTPUT Nwa DPC SING Stop sweep for plot and wait ENTER Nwa Reply Read the 1 when complete OUTPUT Nwa OUTPPLOT Request plotter output 1 ENTER Nwa Plot Plotter output of analyzer display I INPUT Plotter output complete Press RETURN to store on disk Reply t Disk file operations Create data file on disk 32000 256 125 records 1I CREATE ASCII PLOTFILE 1400 125 Use only once to generate file ASSIGN File TO PLOTFILE 1400 Assign file 1 0 path OUTPUT File Plot Write plot string to file t INPUT Plot to file is complete Press Return to plot A t Read plotter commands from file and send to plotter RESET File Reset file pointer to beginning ENTER File Plot Read plot string from file OUTPUT OP1t Plot Send plot string to plotter l DISP Plot is complete End of program OUTPUT Nwa CONT OUTPUT ONwa 0PC WAIT ENTER ONwa Reply LOCAL QNwa END Restore continuous sweep Wait for analzyer to finish Read the 1 when complete Release HP 1B control 2 70 HP BASIC Programming Examples R
194. mmands title the indicated internal register TITR1 TITR2 TITR3 TITRA S TITR5 S TITREG lt I gt TITSEQ lt I gt TITSQ TITIMEM TITTPMTR TITTPERI TITTPRIN TRACK lt ON OFF gt Register 1 Register 2 Register 3 Register 4 Register 5 Titles save recall registers 01 through 31 TITREGO1 through TITREGOS are the same as TITR1 through TITRS Selects the sequence to be titled Provides access to the sequence title functions Sends the title string to trace memory NEWSEQ lt I gt must precede to ensure that a sequence is currently being created or modified Sends the title string to the power meter address NEWSEQ lt I gt must precede to ensure that a sequence is currently being created or modified Sends the title string to the peripheral address NEWSEQ lt I gt must precede to ensure that a sequence is currently being created or modified Sends the title string to the printer address NEWSEQ lt I gt must precede to ensure that a sequence is currently being created or modified Turns marker search tracking ON and OFF HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 79 TRAP TRIG TST Selects the transmission port to measure the transmission response of the device under test HP IB trigger Puts instrument into hold mode Causes a self test and returns a zero if the test is passed These commands set the TTL output and end of sweep pulse TTLHPULS TTLLPULS UP USEPASC TTL norma
195. n kit string 1 23 LEFL 1 64 LEFU 1 64 levels of data 1 22 LIF directory size 1 60 LIF format 1 62 LIMD D 1 64 LIMIAMPO D 1 64 LIMILINE 1 64 LIMIMAOF D 1 64 LIMISTIO D 1 64 LIMITEST 1 64 limit line 1 64 limit line amplitude offset 1 64 limit line stimulus offset 1 64 limit table edit 1 60 limit test 1 64 limit test beeper 1 55 limit test fail 1 62 limit testing HP IB commands 1 46 limit test pass 1 62 LIML D 1 64 LIMM D 1 64 LIMS D 1 64 LIMTFL 1 64 LIMTSL 1 64 LIMTSP 1 64 LIMU D 1 64 linear sweep 1 64 line feeds 1 5 lines for control 1 7 lines for handshaking 1 7 line type data 1 64 memory 1 64 LINFREQ 1 64 LINM 1 64 lin mag 1 64 LINTDATA D 1 64 LINTMEMO D 1 64 LISFREQ 1 64 list clear 1 57 listener interface function 1 6 listen mode L 1 10 list sweep 1 64 list values 1 64 print 1 72 LISV 1 64 L listen mode 1 10 LOAD lt I gt 1 65 LOADSEQ lt I gt 1 65 local command GTL 1 12 Index 6 LOCAL HP IB commands 1 38 local lockout command LLO 1 13 LOGFREQ 1 65 LOGM 1 65 log mag 1 65 log sweep 1 65 LOOC D 1 65 loop counter decrement 1 58 increment 1 63 loop counter value 1 65 lower limit segment 1 64 low pass frequency 1 76 low pass impulse 1 65 low pass step 1 65 LOWPIMPU 1 65 LOWPSTEP 1 65 M MANTRIG 1 65 MARKBUCK D 1 49 MARKCENT 1 66 MARKCONT 1 66 MARKCOUP 1 66 MARKCW 1 66 MARKDELA 1 66 MARKDISC
196. nal solutions become viable mange teem eee EEL NC O rm re tC tT The purpose of this example is to demonstrate several programming options for storing and recalling entire instrument states over HP IB The examples describe two different processes for storing and recalling instrument states The first example accomplishes the task using the learn string The second example involves reading both the learn string and the calibration arrays out of the analyzer and storing them to disk or storing them in the system controller itself Using the learn string is a very rapid way of saving the instrument state but using direct disk access has the advantage of automatically storing calibrations cal kits and data along with the instrument state A complete analyzer setup requires sending the learn string and a calibration array to set the analyzer parameters The CAL array may also be placed in the analyzer just as if a calibration was performed By sending both sets of data the analyzer may be quickly setup for a measurement Several different measurements may be required in the course of testing a device An efficient way of performing multiple measurements is to send both the calibration array and the learn string and then perform the measurements Example 5A Using the Learn String Note This program is stored as EXAMP5A on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer The learn string is a very fast an
197. nction 1 6 talker listener 1 78 talker listener mode 1 11 TALKLIST 1 78 talk mode T 1 10 TEO no extended talker capabilities 1 9 TERI D 1 78 terminal impedance 1 78 terminators 1 5 TESS 1 49 1 78 test port return cables 2 2 test setup calibration 2 10 text color 1 70 ThinkJet 1 72 TIMDTRAN 1 78 time domain bandpass 1 55 time domain gate 1 62 time domain HP IB commands 1 47 time specify 1 78 TINT 1 78 TITF lt I gt 1 79 TITL 1 79 title CRT 1 79 plot to disk 1 79 title disk file 1 79 title register 1 79 title sequence 1 79 title string to trace memory 1 79 title to peripheral 1 79 title to printer 1 79 TITP 1 79 TITREG lt I gt 1 79 TITR lt I gt 1 79 TITSEQ lt I gt 1 79 TITSQ 1 79 TITTMEM 1 79 TITTPERI 1 79 TITTPRIN 1 79 trace data formats and transfers 2 23 trace data transfers 1 19 trace memory 1 21 trace related data 1 16 TRACK 1 79 transfer of data i 7 transferring the measurement data 2 11 transfers and formats of trace data 2 23 transfers of trace data 1 19 transform 1 78 TRAP 1 79 TRIG 1 80 trigger continuous 1 58 external 1 61 hold 1 62 number of groups 1 67 single 1 76 trigger device 1 13 tri state drivers E2 1 9 troubleshooting 2 3 2 5 TST 1 80 T talk mode 1 10 TTLHPULS 1 80 TTLLPULS 1 80 types of syntax 1 5 U units 1 4 units as a function of display format 1 17 universal commands 1 12 UP 1 80 upper limit
198. nd a new table is defined and 30 edited This list is then sent to the analyzer Any number of 40 segments or points may be entered Be sure not to enter more than 50 1632 points or 30 segments 60 4 70 EXAMPGA 80 90 ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 Assign an 1 0 path for the analyzer 100 110 CLEAR SCREEN 120 Initialize the analyzer 130 ABORT 7 140 CLEAR Nwa 150 OUTPUT ONwa OPC PRES 160 ENTER Nwa Reply 170 180 OUTPUT Nwa EDITLIST 190 OUTPUT Nwa CLEL Generate an IFC Interface Clear SDC Selective Device Clear Preset the analyzer and wait Read the 1 when complete sm p p su Begin editing the frequency list Clear the existing list frequencies om 200 210 INPUT Number of segments Numb Read number of segments to define 220 ALLOCATE Table 1 Numb 1 3 Define an array for the list segments 230 240 PRINT USING 10A 154 154 20A SEGMENT START MHZ STOP MHZ NUMBER OF POINTS 250 260 FOR I 1 TO Numb Cycle through the segments and read in the values 270 GOSUB Loadpoin 280 NEXT I 290 3 300 LOOP 310 INPUT DO YOU WANT TO EDIT Y OR N An 320 EXIT IF An N 330 INPUT ENTRY NUMBER I i Get an entry number 340 GOSUB Loadpoin Go load point 350 END LOOP 360 370 OUTPUT Nwa EDITLIST Send the new list to the analyzer HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 53 380 FOR I 1 TO Numb Send one segment at a time 390 OUTPUT ONwa SADD Add a segment 40
199. ndard labelling 1 64 standard offsets 1 67 standard type 1 77 STANE 1 77 STANF 1 77 STANG 1 77 STAR D 1 77 Statistics marker 1 67 status bit definitions 1 24 status byte 1 24 1 26 2 37 STATUS CONSTANTS 2 83 status indicators 1 10 status reporting 1 24 2 37 STB 1 77 STDD 1 77 STDTARBI 1 77 STDTDELA 1 77 STDTLOAD 1 77 STDTOPEN 1 77 STDTSHOR 1 78 step 1 of a measurement 2 10 step 2 of a measurement 2 10 step 3 of a measurement 2 10 step 4 of a measurement 2 11 step 5 of a measurement 2 11 step 6 of a measurement 2 11 step down 1 60 step up 1 80 STIMULUS HP IB commands 1 45 stimulus menu HP IB commands 1 40 stimulus value segment 1 64 STOP D 1 78 storage disk 1 61 internal memory 1 63 store to disk 1 78 STOR lt I gt 1 78 STORSEQ lt T gt 1 78 STPSIZE D 1 78 string for calibration kit 1 23 structure of command syntax 1 4 structure of HP IB bus 1 7 structure of status reporting 1 24 SVCO 1 78 SWEA 1 78 sweep user controlled 2 13 SWET D 1 78 SWR 1 78 synchronization 2 37 syntax for commands 1 3 syntax for output 1 15 syntax structure 1 4 syntax types 1 5 system controller capabilities C1 C2 C3 1 9 system controlier mode 1 10 1 11 SYSTEM HP IB commands 1 46 system setups 2 44 reading calibration data 2 46 using the learn string 2 44 T T6 basic talker 1 9 take control command 1 13 taking the measurement data 2 11 talker interface fu
200. nels 1 58 CRT focus 1 61 CRT intensity 1 63 CRT title 1 79 OW freq 1 58 CWFREQID 1 58 CW time 1 58 CWTIME 1 58 D D 1 31 D1DIVD2 1 58 data include with disk files 1 61 data array formats 1 17 data arrays 1 21 data bus 1 7 data channel 1 color 1 70 data channel 2 color 1 70 data for markers 1 16 data formats and transfers 2 23 data levels 1 22 data only include with disk files 1 61 data processing chain 1 21 data rate 1 8 data reading 1 15 data taking 2 11 data transfer 1 7 2 11 2 23 to a plotter 2 69 using floating point numbers 2 29 using FORM 1 2 35 using FORM 4 2 26 using frequency array information 2 32 using markers 2 24 data transfer character definitions 1 16 Data Transfer Commands Fast 1 22 data transfer for traces 1 19 data units 1 4 DATI 1 58 DC1 complete device clear 1 9 DEBU 1 58 debug 1 58 debug mode 2 5 2 13 decrement loop counter 1 58 DECRLOOC 1 58 default calibration kits 1 56 default colors 1 58 DEFC 1 58 definitions of status bit 1 24 DEFLPRINT 1 59 DEFLTCPIO 1 49 1 59 DEFS D 1 59 DELA 1 59 delay 1 59 1 60 set to mkr 1 66 delete segment 1 74 DEL amp lt I gt 1 59 DELO 1 59 DELRFIXM 1 59 Index 3 delta limits 1 64 delta reference 1 59 DEMOAMPL 1 59 demodulation off 1 59 DEMOOFF 1 59 DEMOPHAS 1 59 DeskJet 1 72 developing program features 2 13 device clear 1 12 device clear DC1 1 9 device connection 2 10
201. next value Read second data value Compute stimulus value for array Convert frequency to MHz mm Print data array values Read next array data points um Restore continuous sweep Wait for analyzer to finish Read the i when complete Release HP IB control Doo Subroutines Hacker dk RR CK k ok CK Pass_control HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 75 1090 PASS CONTROL ONwa Pass control to the analyzer 1100 REPEAT Loop and read HP IB status 1110 STATUS 7 6 Hpib Status from internal HP IB 1120 Reading the controller register does not interfere with the 1130 HP IB disk storage operations taking place Bit 6 is set when 1140 control is returned to the controller 1150 DISP Waiting for control 1160 UNTIL BIT Hpib 6 Loop until control is returned 1170 RETURN 1180 1190 END Running the Program The analyzer is initialized and the operating range re defined to an 11 point trace from 100 to 200 MHz This setup gives a restricted range to be evaluated when the ASCII data file CITIFILE is read in from the controller The operator is prompted for a 5 character filename to use for storing the data The analyzer is setup for external storage and stores the data file Once the pass control storage return control operation is complete the operator is prompted to place the disk in the controller disk drive and press RETURN The disk is then read and the records contained in the file are printed on
202. nfigure PPC or parallel poll unconfigure PPU messages Pass Control If the analyzer is in pass control mode is addressed to talk and receives the take control command TCT from the system control it will take active control of the bus If the analyzer is not requesting control it will immediately pass control to the system controller s address Otherwise the analyzer will execute the function for which it sought control of the bus and then pass control back to the system controller Remote The analyzer will go into remote mode when the remote line is asserted and the analyzer is addressed to listen While the analyzer is held in remote mode all front panel keys with the exception of LOCAL are disabled Changing the analyzer s HP IB status from remote to local does not affect any front panel settings or values Serial Poll The analyzer will respond to a serial poll with its status byte as defined in the Status Reporting section of this chapter To initiate the serial poll sequence address the analyzer to talk and issue a serial poll enable command SPE Upon receiving this command the analyzer will return its status byte End the sequence by issuing a serial poll disable command SPD A serial poll does not affect the value of the status byte and it does not set the instrument to remote mode Trigger In hold mode the analyzer responds to device trigger by taking a single sweep The analyzer responds only to se
203. ng Examples cid For example Type SCRATCH and press RETURN Type EDIT and press RETURN Type in the following program 10 ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 Assigns the analyzer to ADDRESS 716 20 OUTPUT Nwa STAR 10 MHZ Sets the analyzer s start frequency to 10 MHz Note The use of I O paths in binary format transfers allows the user to quickly distinguish the type of transfer taking place I O paths are used throughout the examples and are highly recommended for use in device input output HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 9 Measurement Process This section explains how to organize instrument commands into a measurement sequence A typical measurement sequence consists of the following steps setting up the instrument calibrating the test setup connecting the device under test taking the measurement data post processing the measurement data ao O A CF N qm transferring the measurement data Step 1 Setting Up the Instrument Define the measurement by setting all of the basic measurement parameters These include the sweep type the frequency span the sweep time the number of points in the data trace the RF power level the type of measurement m the IF averaging m the IF bandwidth You can quickly set up an entire instrument state using the save recall registers and the learn string The learn string is a summary of the instrument state compacted into a string that the computer reads and retransmits
204. ng The PEOSTARL gsr e E A Ea a E 2 63 Example 7 Report Generation ss sperm suma es es bd 2 64 Example 7A1 Operation Using Talker Listener Mode 02 2 64 Running the Program UE A e A Oo SES 2 65 Example 7A2 Controlling Peripherals Using Pass Control Mode 2 66 Running the Program sms mes ae a A A eK 2 68 Example 7B Plotting to a File and Transferring File Data to a Plotter 2 69 Running the Program a A A A a a we GA GG 2 71 Utilizing PC Graphics Applications Using the Plot File 2 q 2 71 Example 7C Reading ASCII Disk Files to the System Controller Disk File 2 72 Running the Program amp ace e ae Bed E A 2 76 Limit Line and Data Point Special Functions 2 2 a a 2 77 OVETVIEW Do EI A EG Ee O te Gs A A Ne er Fook ee A 2 78 Example Display of Limit Lines 2 2 ee ee ee 2 2 80 Limit Segments z a A a ee eee we SEA EK 2 81 Q tput Results a Gee amp Ae Ee et le A es BS SAG 2 82 Constants Used Throughout This Document 04 a 2 83 Output Limit Test Pass Fail Status Per Limit Segment 2 22 2 84 Output Pass Fail Status for All Segments a 2 85 Contents 3 Example Program of OUTPSEGAF Using BASIC 2 024 4 Output Minimum and Maximum Point Per Limit Segment 2 2 Output Minimum and Maximum Point For All Segments 2 Example Program of OUTPSEGAM Using BASIC Output Data Per Point Output Data P
205. ng and Command Reference command reads the trace memory if available The trace memory also contains error corrected data Note that neither raw nor error corrected data reflect such post processing functions as electrical delay offset trace math or time domain gating Formatted data This is the array of data actually being displayed It reflects all post processing functions such as electrical delay and time domain The units of the array output depend on the current display format See Table 1 3 for the various units defined as a function of display format Generally formatted data is the most useful of the four data levels because it is the same information the operator sees on the display However if post processing is unnecessary e g possibly in cases involving smoothing error corrected data may be more desirable Error corrected data also affords the user the opportunity to input the data to the network analyzer and apply post processing at another time Learn String and Calibration Kit String The learn string is summary of the instrument state It includes all the front panel settings the limit test tables and the list frequency table for the current instrument state It does not include calibration data or the information stored in the save recall registers The learn string can be output to a controller with the OUTPLEAS executable which commands the analyzer to start transmitting the binary string The string has a fi
206. nge of points a ss O BORE MEP DEA ER Table 2 13 is an interpretation of the min max data per range of points returned using the SELMINPT5 SELMAXPT7 and OUTPDATR commands HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 91 Output Limit Pass Fail by Channel The HP IB commands OUTPLIM1 and OUTPLIM2 output the status of the limit test for channel 1 and channel 2 respectively These commands return the values 1 PASS 0 FAIL or 1 NO_LIMIT if limit testing is disabled Currently the results of limit testing can be retrieved by reading a bit in the status register Example Sending OUTPLIM1 or OUTPLIM2 channel 1 or channel 2 may return the following 1 PASS O FAIL or if limit test not enabled then 1 NO_LIMIT 2 92 HP BASIC Programming Examples Index A abort sequence 2 7 additional information 2 1 BASIC 6 2 2 1 analyzer debug mode 2 13 analyzer features helpful in developing programs 2 13 analyzer operating modes 2 3 pass control mode 2 3 2 66 system control mode 2 3 talker listener 2 3 2 64 array data formats 2 26 FORM 1 2 26 FORM 2 2 26 FORM 3 2 26 FORM 4 2 24 2 26 FORM 5 2 26 ASCII disk files 2 72 reading 2 72 C calibrating the test setup 2 10 calibration data 2 46 inputting 2 46 outputting 2 46 reading 2 46 calibration example program 2 18 calibration kit 2 2 calibration kits 2 18 clearing any messages waiting to be output 2 7 clearing syntax errors 2 7 c
207. nitialize the analyzer 110 ABORT 7 Generate an IFC Interface Clear 120 CLEAR Nwa 1 SDC Selective Device Clear 130 OUTPUT Nwa OPC PRES Preset the analyzer and wait 140 ENTER ONwa Reply Read in the 1 returned 150 160 OUTPUT Nwa OPC SING Single sweep mode and wait 170 ENTER Nwa Reply Read 1 when sweep complete 180 190 OUTPUT ONwa MARK1 t Turn on marker i 200 OUTPUT ONwa SEAMAX t Find the maximum 210 220 OUTPUT Nwa OUTPMARK Request the current marker value 230 ENTER Nwa Valuei Value2 Stim Read three marker values 240 250 Show the marker data received 260 PRINT Value 1 Value 2 Stimulus Hz 270 PRINT Value Value2 Stim t Print the received values 280 PRINT 290 PRINT Compare the active marker block with the received values 300 310 LOCAL Nwa Release HP IB control 320 END Running the Program Run the program The analyzer is preset and a sweep is taken Marker 1 is enabled and positioned on the largest value in the trace The marker is output to the controller and printed on the controller display The analyzer is returned to local control Position the marker using the RPG or data entry keys and compare the displayed value on the analyzer with the value that was transmitted to the controller HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 25 Example 3B Data Transfer Using FORM 4 ASCII Transfer e e e e mm Note This program is stored as EXAMP3B on the HP 8752C Programming Exampl
208. no test 0 for fail and 1 for pass OUTPLIMF OUTPLIML OUTPLIMM OUTPMARK OUTPMEMF OUTPMEMO OUTPMSTA OUTPMWID OUTPMWIL OUTPOPTS OUTPPLOT Outputs the limit test results for each failed point Outputs the limit test results for each point in the sweep This is a form 4 transfer Outputs the limit test results at the marker Outputs the marker values The first two numbers are the marker response values and the last is the stimulus value See Table 1 3 for the meaning of the response values as a function of display format Fast data transfer command for OUTPMEMO Outputs the memory trace from the active channel The data is in real imaginary pairs and can be treated the same as data read with the OUTPDATA command Outputs the marker statistics mean standard deviation and peak to peak variation in that order If statistics is not ON it is turned ON to generate current values and turned OFF again Outputs the marker bandwidths search results bandwidth center and Q in that order If widths is not ON it is turned ON to generate current values and turned OFF again Performs the same operation as OUTPMWID plus appends the loss value as weil Outputs an ASCII string of the options installed Outputs the plot string to the HP IB ports Can be directed to a plotter or read into the computer PSOFT lt ON OFF gt controls whether the softkeys are included in the plot HPB Programming and Command Reference 1 69
209. nsor B HP 438A only l to 12 Stimulus range 9900 to 9900 dB HP 438A only l to 12 Stimulus range O to 200 SYSTEM limit testing Owotf LIMILINE lt ON OFF gt 1 0 On off LIMITEST lt ON OFF gt 1 0 Beeper BEEPFAIL lt ON OFF gt 1 0 Stimulus range Amplitude range Limit offset Stimulus Amplitude LIMIAMPO D D Marker to offset LIMIMAOF LIMISTIO D D T For frequency sweeps 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 300 kHz to 3 GHz for Option 003 and 30 kHz to 6 GHz for Option 006 For power sweeps 15 to 20 dBm in range 0 25 dB maximum in other ranges For CW time 0 to 24 hours For frequency sweep transform on 1 frequency step For CW time sweep transform on 1 time step For log mag 500 dB For phase 500 degrees For Smith chart and Polar 500 units For linear magnitude 500 units For SWR 500 units The scale is always positive and has minimum values of 001 dB 10e 12 degrees 10e 15 seconds and 10 picounits 1 46 HPAB Programming and Command Reference Table 1 8 Key Select Codes continued Edit table Edit segment Function Window shape Demodulation SYSTEM limit testing continued Begin edit Add segment Edit segment D Segment done Delete segment Done with edit Clear list Stimulus value Marker to stimulus Upper limit Lower limit Delta limits Middle value Marker to middle Fiat line type Sloping line type
210. nterface The system controller acts as the master and can regain active control at any time The analyzer is an active controller when it plots prints or stores to an external disk drive in the pass control mode The analyzer is also a system controller when it is operating in the system controller mode 1 6 HP IB Programming and Command Reference HP IB Bus Structure DEVICE A Abie to 1oik tisten amp contro DEVICE B us Et avte to 4otk mimi f d listen ER DS W teik oniy DATA BUS 8 aigra tines 3 HAAR LINES Aereas srta ato Byte Transfer 3 Contre E caine 3 signal fines Genergi interface Management S signo fines iure Oe es SS LINES Figure 1 1 HP IB Bus Structure Data Bus The data bus consists of 8 bi directional lines that are used to transfer data from one device to another Programming commands and data transmitted on these lines are typically encoded in ASCII although binary encoding is often used to speed up the transfer of large arrays Both ASCII and binary data formats are available to the analyzer In addition every byte transferred over HP IB undergoes a handshake to insure valid data Handshake Lines A three line handshake scheme coordinates the transfer of data between talkers and listeners To insure data integrity in multiple listener transfers this technique forces data transfers to occur at the transfer rate of the slowest device connected to the interface W
211. ntiguous and b the last segment extends to the stop frequency Otherwise terminating a segment requires a single point which means that constructing a limit line requires two entries segments of the limit table Thus you have a minimum of 9 lines available and those lines will not be referenced by sequential segment numbers Figure 2 3 is an example of a screen print of limit lines set up on the two instrument channels The limit line examples shown are of Flat Line Slope Line and Single Point Limits See Table 2 5 REF 0 dB 1 6064 dB Hid CES Hid START 030 000 MHz STOP 6 000 000 000 MHz Figure 2 3 Limit Segments Versus Limit Lines 2 80 HP BASIC Programming Examples Limit Segments The values in Table 2 5 were used to create the limit lines in Figure 2 4 Table 2 5 Limit Segment Table for Figure 2 4 Frequency dB dB 1 os 0 5 1 5 2 el 500 MHz Flat Line FL 2 10 5 Channel 2 oe ST Em 4 1 5 Single Point SP 5 mo stone bine ty DS Slope Line St Note that if a single point limit is used to terminate slope lines no test limit segment is created See Figure 2 3 CH1 Seg4 Also if a single point limit is used to terminate a flat line no test limit segment is created See Figure 2 3 CH1 Seg2 However if the single point limit used to terminate the flat line limit has different limit values a single point test limit segment is created See Figure 2 3 C
212. ntroller mode in order to access peripherals from the front panel In this mode the analyzer can directly control peripherals plotters printers disk drives power meters etc and the analyzer may plot print store on disk or perform power meter functions Note Do not attempt to use this mode for programming HP recommends using an external instrument controller when programming See the following section Talker Listener Mode RA A a a Talker Listener Mode This is the mode that is normally used for remote programming of the analyzer In talker listener mode the analyzer and all peripheral devices are controlled from an external instrument controller The controller can command the analyzer to talk and other devices to listen The analyzer and peripheral devices cannot talk directly to each other unless the computer sets up a data path between them This mode allows the analyzer to act as either a talker or a listener as required by the controlling computer for the particular operation in progress Pass Control Mode This mode allows the computer to control the analyzer via HP IB as with the talker listener mode but also allows the analyzer to take control of the interface in order to plot print or access a disk During an analyzer controlled peripheral operation the host computer is free to perform other internal tasks i e data or display manipulation while the analyzer is controlling the bus After the analyzer control
213. nuous sweep mode a The analyzer is returned to local control and the program ends HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 73 The program is written as follows 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 i This program shows how to store an ASCII data file in CITIFILE format and retrieve the data with the controller The disk is written in the analyzer system and then moved to the controller disk drive and the data accessed i EXAMP7C 1 ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 Assign an I 0 path for the analyzer I CLEAR SCREEN ABORT 7 i Generate an IFC Interface Clear CLEAR Nwa 1 SDC Selected Device Clear OUTPUT Nwa 0OPC PRES Preset the analyzer and wait ENTER Nwa Reply Read the 1 when complete i DIM Record 80 String to read the disk records i Set up analyzer OUTPUT Nwa STARLOOMHZ Start frequency 100 MHz OUTPUT Nwa STOP 200MHZ OUTPUT Nwa POINi1 Stop frequency 200 MHz Trace length 11 points sn sue sae pe O OUTPUT O Nwa OPC SING Single sweep and wait ENTER Nwa Reply Read in the 1 when complete i Program disk storage operation i OUTPUT Nwa USEPASC Enable pass control mode OUTPUT QNwa EXTD Select external disk file GOSUB Pass control OUTPUT ONwa EXTMFORMON
214. o marker value Span Reference Delay Pon ee oe o E SEAOFF 1 SEAMAX 1 SEAMIN 1 SEATARGID 3 Amplitude range Search left SEAL 1 Search right SEAR 1 Width Search Value Search on off WIDVID WIDT lt ON OFF gt 2 Amplitude range Tracking search On off TRACK lt ONJOFF gt 2 Statisties On off MEASTAT lt ON OFF gt 2 For log mag 500 dB For phase 500 degrees For Smith chart and Polar 500 units For linear magnitude 500 units For SWR 500 units The scale is always positive and has minimum values of 001 dB 10e 12 degrees 10e 15 seconds and 10 picounits 1 42 HP IB Programming and Command Reference A Purge Store Titie Include with disk files Save format Select storage Disk format Table 1 8 Key Select Codes continued Selected reg Selected reg Selected reg Selected reg AU regs Selected reg Selected reg Internal reg Internal reg Plot Selected files To disk Disk file Data Raw data Formatted data User graphics Data only ASCH citifile Binary From disk File titles External disk External disk LIF Directory size Internal memory External Disk DOS LIF SAVE lt I gt SAVEREG lt I gt CLEA lt I gt CLEAREG lt I gt CLEARALL RECA lt I gt RECAREG lt I gt TITR lt I gt TITREG lt I gt 8 TITP S PURG lt I gt STOR lt I gt TITF
215. o talk The i i i 40 controller watches for EOI at the end of the plot sequence and J l t 50 then regains control of the HP IB operations 60 TO EXAMPTA 80 90 ASSIGN QNwa TO 716 Assign an I 0 path for the analyzer 100 110 CLEAR SCREEN 120 Initialize analzyer without preset preserve data 130 ABORT 7 Generate an IFC Interface Clear 140 CLEAR Nwa SDC Selected Device Clear 150 160 OUTPUT Nwa OPC SING Stop sweep and prepare for plot 170 ENTER Nwa Reply Read in 1 when completed 180 190 OUTPUT GNwa OUTPPLOT Send plot command 200 SEND 7 UNL LISTEN 5 TALK 16 DATA Unlisten address devices and plot 210 DISP Plotting and waiting for EOI 220 WAIT 5 Pause 500 mS to start process 230 240 REPEAT i Loop until EOI detected bit is set ae 250 STATUS 7 7 Stat 260 UNTIL BIT Stat 11 270 280 End plot DISP End of plot 290 300 OUTPUT QNwa CONT 310 OUTPUT Nwa OPC WAIT 320 ENTER Nwa Reply 330 LOCAL Nwa 340 END Read HP IB interface register 7 Test bit 11 EOI on HP IB Restore continuous sweep Wait for analyzer to finish Read the 1 when complete Release remote control em com ee Running the Program The analyzer will go into remote and make the plot During the plot the computer will display the message Plotting and waiting for EOI When the plot is completed the analyzer asserts the EOI line on the HP IB The computer detects this and di
216. o the analyzer to clear all of the status reporting registers and their enables Type SCRATCH and press RETURN Type EDIT and press RETURN Type in the following program 10 ABORT 7 This halts all bus action and gives active control to the computer HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 7 20 CLEAR 716 This clears all HP IB errors resets the HP IB interface and clears the syntax errors It does not affect the status reporting system 30 OUTPUT 716 PRES Presets the instrument This clears the status reporting system as well as resets all of the front panel settings except for the HP IB mode and the HP IB addresses 40 END Running this program brings the analyzer to a known state ready to respond to HP IB control The analyzer will not respond to HP IB commands unless the remote line is asserted When the remote line is asserted the analyzer is addressed to listen for commands from the controller In remote mode all the front panel keys are disabled with the exception of and the line power switch ABORT 7 asserts the remote line which remains asserted until a LOCAL 7 statement is executed Another way to assert the remote line is to execute REMOTE 716 This statement asserts the analyzer s remote operation mode and addresses the analyzer to listen for commands from the controller Press any front panel key except LOCAL Note that none of the front panel keys will respond until has been pressed can also be disabled with the s
217. oa sa dd e a eee ed ee Sh ets Constants Used Throughout This Document 2 0 a Output Limit Test Pass Fail Status Per Limit Segment Output Pass Fail Status for Al Segments 2 2 2 Example Program of OUTPSEGAF Using BASIC Output Minimum and Maximum Point Per Limit Segment Output Minimum and Maximum Point For Al Segments Example Program of OUTPSEGAM Using BASIC Output Data Per FOME ss O TO E ARE A OA Output Data Per Range of Points 2 1 1 a a ea a 2 Output Limit Pass Fail by Channel lt lt caes e Index Contents 2 2 71 2 72 2 76 2 77 2 78 2 80 2 85 2 85 2 87 2 88 2 89 2 90 2 91 2 92 Figures 2 1 The HP 8752C Network Analyzer System with Controller 2 2 2 2 2 Status Reporting Structure ee e oe ee ee BS ae we RE we es 2 37 2 3 Limit Segments Versus Limit Lines ee ee 2 80 Tables 2 1 Additional BASIC 6 2 Programming Information 4 2 1 2 2 Additional HP IB Information sie poa ad AA we Ge SS A 2 1 2 3 HP 8752C Network Analyzer Array Data Formats 44 2 26 2 4 Limit Line and Data Point Special Functions Commands 2 2 78 2 5 Limit Segment Table for Figure 2 4 2 2 a 2 81 2 6 Example Output OUTPSEGAM min max of all segments 2 2 82 2 7 Pass Fail No_Limit Status Constants
218. oad data INPUT STIMULUS VALUE MHz Table I 1 and print table created INPUT UPPER LIMIT VALUE DB Table I 2 INPUT LOWER LIMIT VALUE DB Table I 3 690 INPUT LIMIT TYPE FL FLAT SL SLOPED SP SINGLE POINT Limtype 1 700 3 710 Format and display table values 720 PRINT TABXY 0 1 1 I TAB 10 Table 1 1 TAB 30 Table 1 2 TAB 45 Table 1 3 TAB 67 Limtype 1 730 RETURN Next limit value 740 750 END Running the Program Caution This example program will delete any existing limit lines before entering the new limits If this is not desired omit the line s that clear the existing limits in this case LINE 190 This program begins by presetting the analyzer The programmer will have to add the necessary command lines to set the analyzer to the operating conditions required for testing The example program will show the limit lines defined but the limits will always fail without additional analyzer setup The program displays the limit table as it is entered During editing the displayed table is updated as each line is edited The table is not reordered At the completion of editing the table is entered into the analyzer and limit testing mode switched ON The analyzer will rearrange the table in ascending order starting with the lowest start frequency entry During editing simply pressing leaves an entry at the old value 2 60 HP BASIC Programming Examples Example 6D Performing PASS FAIL Tests While Tunin
219. of string a 18 OUTPUT Nwa OUTPLEAS Output the learn string g 19 ENTER Nwa_bin Header Length Read header and length first 20 21 ALLOCATE INTEGER State Length 2 Integer array to contain the string 23 ENTER ONwa_bin State x Read the string 24 LOCAL Nwa Release HP IB control 25 26 INPUT Change state and press ENTER A 27 28 OUTPUT Nwa INPULEAS Send the learnstring to analyzer 29 OUTPUT ONwa_bin Header Length State 30 DISP Analyzer state has been restored 31 32 OUTPUT GNwa OPC7 WAIT Wait for the analzyer to finish 33 ENTER Nwa Reply Read the i when complete 34 LOCAL ONwa Release HP IB control 35 END Running the Program Run the program When the program stops change the instrument state and press on the controller The analyzer will be returned to its original state by sending the learn string to the analyzer HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 45 Example 5B Reading Calibration Data i a ees apa CO a Se ten te ee ee ee aoa a Note This program is stored as EXAMP5B on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer This example demonstrates a How to read measurement calibration data out of the analyzer m How to read it back into the analyzer How to determine which calibration is active The data used to perform measurement error correction is stored inside the analyzer in one or more of three calibration coefficient arrays Each array is a spec
220. om a linear frequency sweep to frequency can be done by querying the analyzer start frequency the frequency span and the number of points in the sweep Given that information the frequency of point N in a linear frequency sweep is F Start_frequency N 1 x Span Points 1 Example 3B illustrates this technique It is a straight forward solution for linear uniform sweeps For other sweep types frequency data is more difficult to construct and may best be read directly from the analyzer s limit test array See Example 3D for an explanation of this technique The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence m An I O path is assigned for the analyzer w The system is initialized The trace data array is allocated m The trace length is set to 11 m The selected frequency span is swept once m The FORM 4 ASCII format is set 2 26 HP BASIC Programming Examples a The formatted trace is read from the analyzer and displayed a The frequency increments between the points are calculated a The marker is activated and placed at 30 kHz m The instrument is returned to local control and the program ends The program is written as follows 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 This program shows an ASCII format trace data transfer using form 4 The data is received as a string
221. on sequence has occurred since the last read of the register Event Status Register B ECC A Single sweep number of groups A single sweep group or calibration step has been completed since the last or calibration step complete read of the register Service routine waiting or done An internal service routine has completed operation or is waiting for an operator response Data entry complete A terminator key has been pressed or a value entered over HP 1B since the last read of the register Limit failed Channel 2 Limit test failed on Channel 2 Limit failed Channel 1 Limit test failed on Channel 1 Search failed Channel 2 A marker search was executed on Channel 2 but the target value was not found Search failed Channel 1 A marker search was executed on Channel 1 but the target value was not found Copy Complete A copy has been completed since the last read of the register HPB Programming and Command Reference 1 25 The Status Byte The analyzer has a status reporting mechanism that reports information about specific analyzer functions and events The status byte consisting of summary bits is the top level register Each bit reflects the condition of another register or queue If a summary bit is set equals 1 the corresponding register or queue should be read to obtain the status information and clear the condition Reading the status byte does not affect the state of the summary bits The summary bits always ref
222. on the calibration kit Calibration kits The calibration kit tells the analyzer what standards to expect at each step of the calibration The set of standards associated with a given calibration is termed a class For example measuring the short during a reflection 1 port measurement calibration is one calibration step All of the shorts that can be used for this calibration step make up the class which is called class S11B For the 7 mm and the 3 5 mm cal kits class S11B uses only one standard For type N cal kits class S11B contains two standards male and female shorts When doin Selecting standard When doing the same calibration in type N selectin rings up a second menu allowing the operator to select which standard in the class is to be measured The sex listed refers to the test port if the test port is female then the operator selects the female short option reflection 1 port measurement calibration use a 7 or 3 5 mm calibration kit automatically measures the short because the class contains only one Doing an S l port measurement calibration over HP IB is very similar When using a T or 3 5 mm calibration kit sending CLASS11B will automatically measure the short In type N sending CLASS11B brings up the menu with the male and female short options To select a standard use STANA or STANB The STAN command is appended with the letters A through G corresponding to the standards listed under softkeys 1 throu
223. onic for the start key 10 is the data and MHZ are the units Where possible the analyzer s root mnemonics are derived from the equivalent key label Otherwise they are derived from the common name for the function Chapter 1 HP IB Programming and Command Reference lists all the root mnemonics and all the different units accepted The semicolon following MHZ terminates the command within the analyzer It removes start frequency from the active entry area and prepares the analyzer for the next command If there is a syntax error in a command the analyzer will ignore the command and look for the next terminator When it finds the next terminator it starts processing incoming commands normally Characters between the syntax error and the next terminator are lost A line feed also acts as a terminator The BASIC OUTPUT statement transmits a carriage return line feed following the data This can be suppressed by putting a semicolon at the end of the statement The OUTPUT 716 statement will transmit all items listed as long as they are separated by commas or semicolons including literal information enclosed in quotes numeric variables string variables and arrays 2 4 HP BASIC Programming Examples A carriage return line feed is transmitted after each item Again this can be suppressed by terminating the commands with a semicolon The analyzer automatically goes into remote mode when it receives an OUTPUT command from the con
224. ontain ASCII characters which represent the plotter commands in HP GL Hewlett Packard Graphics Language A disk file is created and the string is written into the file containing the display plot commands Once the strings are transferred to the disk file the file pointer is rewound and the data is read out into a string for plotting The string is sent to the plotter which uses the commands to generate a plot The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence w An I O path is assigned for the analyzer a An I O path is assigned for the plotter w The system is initialized m The string for plotter commands is defined m The frequency span is swept once u The plotter output is requested and read into the plot string m A plot file is created in the controller u The plot string is stored into the disk file mw The plot string is read from the disk file and sent to the plotter u The analyzer returns to continuous sweep mode The analyzer is returned to local control and the program ends HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 69 The program is written as follows 10 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 This program shows how to read the plotter output from the analyzer and store it in a disk file as an ASCII file The disk file is then read back into the controller and the plot commands sent to a 1 plotter to generate the plot of the analyzer display This allows plotting at a different ti
225. ow to use both the learn string and the calibration arrays to completely re program the analyzer state If you were performing two entirely different measurements on a device and wanted to quickly change between instrument states and perform the measurements this example program is a potential solution The example will request the learn string and calibration array from the analyzer and store them in a disk file on the system controller Once the storage is complete the operator will be prompted to change the state of the analyzer and then re load the state that was previously stored in the disk file Once the file is created on the disk the state information can be retrieved from the controller and restored on the analyzer Note The disk file can only be created once Errors will occur if the operator repeatedly tries to re create the file For this example only a through calibration will be performed and transferred This means only one calibration array will be read from the analyzer and written to the disk file with the instrument state To work with more elaborate calibrations additional arrays will need to be defined and transferred to the disk file This is not difficult but requires some further programming steps which were omitted in the interest of presenting a simple example The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence w An LO path is assigned for the analyzer m A binary path is assigned m The inte
226. ple STAR 0 2E 10 sets the start frequency to 2 GHz Character strings 1 4 HP IB Programming and Command Reference must be enclosed by double quotation marks For example A title string using RMB BASIC would look like OUTPUT 716 TITL assis where the first two are an escape so that RMB BASIC will interpret the third properly unit The units of the operand if applicable If no units are specified the analyzer assumes the basic units as described previously The data is entered into the e i function when either units or a terminator are received terminator Indicates the end of the command enters the data and switches the active entry area OFF A semicolon is the recommended terminator Terminators are not necessary for the analyzer to interpret commands correctly but in the case of a syntax error the analyzer will attempt to recover at the next terminator The analyzer also interprets line feeds and HP IB END OR IDENTIFY EOI messages as terminators A Syntax Types o The specific syntax types are SYNTAX TYPE 1 code terminator These are simple action commands that require no complementary information such as AUTO autoscales the active channel SYNTAX TYPE 2 code lappendage terminator These are simple action commands requiring limited customization such as CORRON and CORROFF error correction ON or OFF or RECA1 RECA2 RECA3 recall register 1 2 3 There can be no characters or sym
227. r 3 Register 4 Register 5 Recalls save recall registers 01 through 31 RECAREGO1 through RECAREGOS are the same as RECA1 through RECAS OPC compatible Recalis previously saved display colors Enters the reference position 0 is the bottom 10 is the top of the graticule Recall file titles from disk Requires pass control mode Enters the reference line value Resume cal sequence HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 73 RESD RESPDONE REST Restores the measurement display after viewing the operating parameters or list values Completes the response calibration sequence OPC compatible Measurement restart Selects the reflection port to measure the reflection response of the device under test Selects a plot in the lower right quadrant Selects a plot in the upper right quadrant Resets colors for the selected group Presets the instrument OPC compatible These 2 commands select the S parameter for the active channel Sli 21 SADD SAV1 SAVC Same as RFLP Same as TRAP During either a list frequency or limit table edit adds a new segment to the table Completes the 1 port calibration sequence OPC compatible Completes the transfer of error correction coefficients back into the instrument OPC compatible These commands store the current instrument state in the indicated internal register These commands are all OPC compatible SAVEI SAVE2 SAVES SAVE4 SAVE5 SAVEREG lt I gt R
228. r identify control line 1 7 Epson P2 1 72 equipment optional 2 2 required 2 1 error corrected data 1 21 error correction example program 2 18 error correction HP IB commands 1 32 error output 1 27 error queue 2 38 error reporting 1 24 ESB 1 54 1 61 ESE D 1 54 1 61 ESNB D 1 54 1 61 ESR 1 54 1 61 event status register 1 24 1 26 event status register B 2 61 event status registers 2 37 example measurement calibration 2 18 EXTD 1 61 extended listener capabilities LEO 1 9 external trigger 1 61 EXTMDATA 1 61 EXTMDATO 1 61 EXTMFORM 1 61 EXTMGRAP 1 61 EXTMRAW 1 61 EXTTHIGH 1 49 1 61 EXTTLOW 1 49 1 61 EXTTOFF 1 61 EXTTON 1 61 EXTTPOIN 1 61 F Fast Data Transfer Commands 1 22 features helpful in developing programming routines 2 13 file names disk 1 29 file titles recall 1 73 firmware revision identification 1 15 FIXE 1 61 fixed load 1 61 fixed marker 1 59 flat line type 1 64 FOCU D 1 61 FORMI 1 54 1 61 FORM1 format 1 18 FORM2 1 54 1 61 FORM2 format 1 18 FORMS 1 54 1 61 FORMS format 1 18 FORMA 1 54 1 61 form 4 data transfer character string 1 16 FORMA format 1 18 FORMOS 1 54 1 61 FORMS format 1 18 format disk 1 62 format display units 1 17 FORMATDOS 1 62 FORMAT HP IB commands 1 37 FORMATLIF 1 62 formats and transfers of trace data 2 23 formats for array data 1 17 formats for commands 1 4 formatted data 1 21 include with disk files
229. re that a sequence is currently being created or modified POIN D Sets the number of points in the sweep POLA Selects the polar display format These commands select the marker readout format for polar display POLMLIN Linear markers POLMLOG Log markers POLMRI Real Amaginary markers PORE lt ON OFF gt Turn port extensions ON and OFF These commands set the port extension length for the indicated port PORTI D Reflection Same as PORTRID PORT2 D Transmission Same as PORTT D PORTR D Reflection PORTT D Transmission POWE D Sets the output power level POWLFREQ D Selects the frequency for which a power loss correction is entered This must be followed by a POWLLOSS D which sets the value POWLLIST Begins editing a power loss list for use with a power meter or with some source tests HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 71 POWLLOSS D POWM lt ON OFF gt POWS POWT lt ON OFF gt PRANO PRANI PRAN2 PRAN3 PRAN4 PRAN5 PRANG PRAN7 PRES PRIC PRINALL PRINSEQ lt I gt PRINTALL PRIS PRNTRAUTF lt ON OFF gt PRNTRFORF PRNTYP540 PRNTYPDJ PRNTYPEP PRNTYPLJ PRNTYPPJ PRNTYPTJ Sets the loss value for a particular frequency POWLFREQID in the power loss list Selects whether the HP 436A ON or the HP 437B 438A OFF is to be used as the power meter in service procedures Selects power sweep from the sweep type menu Turning power trip OFF clears a power trip after an overload
230. ressing the analyzer to talk This illuminates the analyzer front panel talk T light The computer places the data transmitted by the analyzer into the variables listed in the ENTER statement In this case the analyzer transmits the output power which gets placed in the variable Reply The ENTER statement takes the stream of binary data output from the analyzer and reformats it back into numbers and ASCII strings With the formatting set to its default state the ENTER statement will format the data into real variables integers or ASCII strings depending on the variable being filled The variable list must match the data the analyzer has to transmit If there are not enough variables data is lost If there are too many variables for the data available a BASIC error is generated The formatting done by the ENTER statement can be changed For more information on data formatting see Chapter 1 HP IB Programming and Command Reference under the section titled Array Data Formats The formatting can be deactivated to allow binary transfers of data Also the ENTER USING statement can be used to selectively control the formatting ON OFF commands can be also be queried The reply is a one 1 if the function is active a zero 0 if it is not active Similarly if a command controls a function that is underlined on the analyzer softkey menu when active querying that command yields a one 1 if the command is underlined a zero 0 if it
231. rkers and marker functions OFF Enters the marker amplitude as the reference value Enters the span between the active marker and the delta reference as the sweep span Enters the marker stimulus as the start stimulus During a limit segment edit enters the marker stimulus as the limit stimulus break point Enters the marker stimulus as the stop stimulus Uncouples the markers between channels as opposed to MARKCOUP Places the fixed marker at the active marker position and makes it the delta reference Sets the maxiraum valid frequency of a standard being defined during a cal kit modification 1 66 HP IB Programming and Command Reference MEASA MEASB MEASR Measures and displays input A on the active channel Measures and displays input B on the active channel Measures and displays input R on the active channel MEASTAT lt ON OFF gt Turns trace statistics ON and OFF MENU lt ON OFF gt Blanks the softkey menu Use with caution as this may give unusual results when setting up an instrument state Recommend setting up states using MENU lt ON gt default and when setup is complete using MENU lt OFF gt These commands bring up the menu associated with the indicated front panel key MENUAVG MENUCAL MENUCOPY MENUDISP MENUFORM MENUMARK MENUMEAS MENUMRKF MENURECA MENUSAVE MENUSEQU MENUSCAL MENUSTIM MENUSYST MINF D AVG CAL COPY DISPLAY FORMAT MARKER MEAS MARKER FCTN SAVE RECALL SAVE RECALL
232. rnstring revision LRN to input to or output from the analyzer The valid parameters are O Defaults to current revision 101 Revision 8752A 1 01 103 Revision 8752A B 1 03 510 Revision 8752C 5 10 20 Revision 8752C 5 20 526 Revision 8752C 5 26 530 Revision 8752C 5 30 534 Revision 8752C 5 34 538 Revision 8752C 5 38 540 Revision 8752C 5 40 548 Revision 8752C 5 48 612 Revision 8752C 6 12 This is an HP IB only command There is no front panel equivalent Selects the last point number in the range of points that the OUTPDATR command will report D can range from 0 to the number of points minus 1 Selects the first point number in the range of points that the OUTPDATR command will report D can range from 0 to the number of points minus 1 Selects the point number that the OUTPDATR command will report D can range from 0 to the number of points minus 1 Selects the segment number to report on for the OUTPSEGF and OUTPSEGM commands D can range from 1 to 18 Selects sequence 1 through 6 HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 75 SEQWAITID SETBIT D SETF SETZ SHOM SING SLID SLIL SLIS SLOPE D SLOPO lt ON OFF gt SMIC Tells the instrument to wait D seconds during a sequence NEWSEQ lt I gt must precede to ensure that a sequence is currently being created or modified Sets the specified bit 0 to 3 on the TTL output Sets the frequency for low pass transform Option 010 Sets the ch
233. roller can pass control to another controller but only the system controller can assume unconditional control Only one system controller is allowed 1 8 HP IB Programming and Command Reference HP IB Operational Capabilities On the network analyzer s rear panel next to the HP IB connector there is a list of HP IB device subsets as defined by the IEEE 488 2 standard The analyzer has the following capabilities SH1 AHI T6 L4 SR1 RLI PPO DCI DTI C1 C2 03 C10 E2 LEO TEO Full source handshake Full acceptor handshake Basic talker answers serial poll unaddresses if MLA is issued No talk only mode Basic listener unaddresses if MTA is issued No listen only mode Complete service request SRQ capabilities Complete remote local capability including local lockout Does not respond to parallel poll Complete device clear Responds to a Group Execute Trigger GET in the hold trigger mode System controller capabilities in system controller mode Pass control capabilities in pass control mode Tri state drivers No extended listener capabilities No extended talker capabilities These codes are completely explained in the IEEE Std 488 documents published by the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Inc 345 East 47th Street New York New York 11017 HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 8 HP IB Status Indicators When the analyzer is connected to other instruments over the HP IB
234. rvice request SRQ when set In turn the instrument controller can be set up to generate an interrupt on the SRQ and respond to the condition which caused the SRQ To generate an SRQ a bit in the status byte is enabled using the command SREn A one 1 in a bit position enables that bit in the status byte Hence SRE 8 enables an SRQ on bit 3 the check error queue since the decimal value 8 equals 00001000 in binary representation Whenever an error is put into the error queue and bit 3 is set the SRQ line is asserted illuminating the S indicator in the HP IB status block on the front panel of the analyzer The only way to clear the SRQ is to disable bit 3 re enable bit 3 or read out all the errors from the queue A bit in the event status register can be enabled so that it is summarized by bit 5 of the status byte If any enabled bit in the event status register is set bit 5 of the status byte will also be set For example ESE 66 enables bits 1 and 6 of the event status register since in binary the decimal number 66 equals 01000010 Hence whenever active control is requested or a front panel key is pressed bit 5 of the status byte will be set Similarly ESNBn enables bits in event status register B so that they will be summarized by bit 2 in the status byte To generate an SRQ from an event status register enable the desired event status register bit Then enable the status byte to generate an SRQ For instance ESE 32 SRE 32 enabl
235. s 1 In most cases this is an easy solution for determining the related frequency value that corresponds with a data point This technique is illustrated in Example 3B Data Transfer Using FORM 4 ASCII Transfer located in Chapter 2 When using log sweep or a list frequency sweep the points are not evenly spaced over the frequency range of the sweep In these cases an effective way of determining the frequencies of the current sweep is to use the OUTPLIML command Although this command is normally used for limit lines it can also be used to identify all of the frequency points in a sweep Limit lines do not need to be on in order to read the frequencies directly out of the instrument with the OUTPLIML command Refer to Example 3D Data Transfer Using Frequency Array Information located in Chapter 2 HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 19 Note Another method of identifying all of the frequency points in a sweep is to use the marker commands MARKBUCKx and OUTPMARK in a FOR NEXT programming loop that corresponds to the number of points in the sweep MARKBUCKx places a marker at a point in the sweep where x is the number of the point in a sweep and OUTPMARK outputs the stimulus value as part of the marker data 1 20 HP IB Programming and Command Reference Data Processing Chain This section describes the manner in which the analyzer processes measurement data It includes information on data arrays common o
236. s 2 61 PC graphics applications example program 2 71 plot file and PC graphics example program 2 71 plotting to a file 2 69 plotting remote 2 64 2 66 post processing the measurement data 2 11 preparing for remote operation 2 7 presetting the instrument 2 7 printing remote 2 64 2 66 processing after taking measurement data 2 11 process of measuring 2 10 program debugging 2 13 program development features 2 13 program example measurement calibration 2 18 program information 2 13 Q querying commands 2 5 R recommended disk drives 2 2 recommended plotters 2 2 recommended printers 2 2 remote mode 2 5 report generation 2 64 routing debugging 2 13 S SELMAXPT D 2 78 SELMINPT D 2 78 SELPT D 2 78 SELSEGID 2 78 serial poll 2 37 service request 2 41 setting addresses 2 2 setting the control mode 2 2 setting up the instrument 2 10 setting up the system 2 2 status byte 2 37 STATUS CONSTANTS 2 83 status reporting 2 37 step 1 of a measurement 2 10 step 2 of a measurement 2 10 step 3 of a measurement 2 10 step 4 of a measurement 2 11 step 5 of a measurement 2 11 step 6 of a measurement 2 11 sweep user controlled 2 13 synchronization 2 37 system setups 2 44 reading calibration data 2 46 using the learn string 2 44 T taking the measurement data 2 11 test port return cables 2 2 test setup calibration 2 10 trace data formats and transfers 2 23 transf
237. s Reporting sar Le Se ira OA Bas Gs me ee AO o RR E i 2 37 Example 4A Using the Error Queue 2 7 ee eee o 2 38 Running the Program ns ate A ASAS ek Se 2 39 Example 4B Generating Interrupts 02 i tara a ok ing 2 41 Running the Program sda o ee ee A A Re oe 2 43 Example 5 Network Analyzer System Setups 0 2 44 Saving and Recalling Instrument States 2 2 2 44 Example 5A Using the Learn String 0 2 44 Running the Program Ses AN RE A ee A ON ee O 2 45 Example 5B Reading Calibration Data 2 46 Running the Program Sos AA RA A Be A dl 2 48 Example 5C Saving and Restoring the Analyzer Instrument State 2 49 Running the Program os ee a E Pe RSS 2 51 Example 6 Limit Line Testing ace so eo et ASS Se A E EA VD O A 2 52 Using List Frequency Mode er ee 2 52 Example 6A Setting Up a List Frequency Sweep 2 2 2 ee 2 52 Running the Program do ese ge a Gc Ce ca O Be e 2 54 Example 6B Selecting a Single Segment from a Table of Segments 2 55 Running the Program a stk eae eR ee AA IS a es A a 2 57 Using Limit Lines to Perform PASS FAIL Tests 2 0 2 2 2 o es 2 58 Example 6C Setting Up Limit Lines 2 2 2 a ee ee 2 58 Running the Program E 2 aS A SS i A e RAS e 2 60 Example 6D Performing PASS FAIL Tests While Tuning 2 4 2 61 Runni
238. s cabling system many different types of devices including instruments computers power meters plotters printers and disk drives can be connected in parallel Every HP IB device must be capable of performing one or more of the following interface functions Talker A talker is a device capable of transmitting device dependent data when addressed to talk There can be only one active talker at any given time Examples of this type of device include power meters disk drives voltmeters counters tape readers The network analyzer is a talker when it sends trace data or marker information over the bus Listener A listener is a device capable of receiving device dependent data over the interface when addressed to listen There can be as many as 14 listeners connected to the interface at any given time Examples of this type of device include printers u power supplies m signal generators The network analyzer is a listener when it is controlled over the bus by a system controller Controlier A controller is defined as a device capable of 1 managing the operation of the bus 2 addressing talkers and listeners There can be only one active controller on the interface at any time Examples of controllers include desktop computers minicomputers workstations and the network analyzer In a muitiple controller system active control can be passed between controllers but there can only be one system controller connected to the i
239. sed and to connect the next device for testing x The program initializes the pass counter and begins to measure the new device The program is written as follows 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 so 140 150 160 170 180 190 200 210 220 230 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 This program demonstrates Pass Fail tests using limit lines The program uses the latch on fail limit bits in event status register t B to determine if the device performance passes the specified test limit lines It then requires that the device passes for multiple consecutive sweeps in order to ensure that the device is static in the response and not varying The operator specifies how many sweeps are required to pass the test i 1 H EXAMP6D ASSIGN QNwa TO 716 Assign an 1 0 path for the analyzer i CLEAR SCREEN Initialize the analyzer No preset to retain settings for testing ABORT 7 Generate an IFC Interface Clear CLEAR Nwa SDC Selected Device Clear i INPUT Number of consecutive passed sweeps for qualification Qual Pass 0 Initialize pass counter on entry t Tune DISP TUNE DEVICE AS NECESSARY Device is not passing warning Measure OUTPUT Nwa OPC SING Single sweep and wait ENTER Nwa Reply Read the i when completed f QUTPUT ONwa ESB Event status register B byte ENTER Nwa Estat Reading byte clears the register
240. segment 1 64 Index 13 USEPASC 1 80 user controllable sweep 2 13 user defined cal kits 1 56 user defined kit save 1 74 user graphics include with disk files 1 61 USESENSA 1 80 USESENSB 1 80 use sensor A 1 80 use sensor B 1 80 V valid characters 1 4 velocity factor 1 80 VELOFACT D 1 80 verifying HP IB operation 2 2 W WAIT 1 80 waiting for group execute trigger 1 13 waiting for reverse get bit 1 13 Index 14 warning color 1 70 warning beeper 1 55 WAVD 1 80 WAVE 1 80 WIDT 1 80 WIDV D 1 80 WINDMAXI 1 80 WINDMINI 1 80 WINDNORM 1 80 window maximum 1 80 minimum 1 80 normal 1 80 shape 1 80 value 1 80 WINDOWID 1 80 WINDUSEM 1 80 WRSK lt I gt 1 54 1 80 Z ZO 1 76 Contents EEE mer eet tN EEEE EE EEEE DEP PASTE TT EE a IE TR AO 1 HP IB Programming and Command Reference Where to Look for More Information eee 1 2 Analyzer Command Syntax des s o a e a 1 3 Code Naming Convention vc 6 6 be a a s m A a 1 3 Valid Characters o u i c ae ae ae ee Bc et OE te e a O ae 1 4 UniS os a a A GO ae BS 1 4 Command Formats ss res E dose cs pe AA OR RR A ee Ee Se ee 1 4 General Structure Losso Ge a ee a te Ra eS we WE EES DE 1 4 Syntax Types O e is Gi ip wie Sree de Eby he e AN eggs SY BNE 15 HP IB Operation Bs ESSE wide e e AE sey ates ahaa Da GP 1 6 Device CUPOS s a seda SH A ee ae a e he BAG Ge eS 1 6 Tal
241. sequence but remember that the analyzer automatically re orders the table in order of increasing start frequency The limit test table is also carried as part of the learn string While it cannot be modified as part of the learn string the learn string can be stored and recalled with very little effort See the section titled Data Processing Chain in Chapter 1 for details on using learn strings This example takes advantage of the computer s capabilities to simplify creating and editing the table The table is entered and completely edited before being transmitted to the analyzer To simplify the programming task options such as entering offsets are not included This example automates the front panel operation of entering a limit test table Front panel operation and limits are discussed in the Application and Operation Concepts chapter of the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide The following is an outline of the program s processing sequence u An I O path is assigned for the analyzer m The system is initialized m The limit lines are edited and cleared m The number of limits is requested m The limit table is created m The string array of limit types is created a The operator is prompted to enter the new limit values m The new limit table is sent back to the analyzer n The limit line is activated a The limit test is activated a The analyzer is returned to local control and the program ends 2 58 HP BASIC
242. set to the default settings before the instrument state is transferred back I EXAMPSC ASSIGN Q Nwa TO 716 Assign an 1 0 path for the analyzer ASSIGN CNwa bin TO 716 FORMAT OFF Assign a binary path i INTEGER Head Length Integer 2 byte format for headers 1 CLEAR SCREEN Initialize the analyzer ABORT 7 t Generate an IFC Interface Clear CLEAR Nwa SDC Selected Device Clear i Read in the learn string as a form 1 binary data trace DIM Learn 3000 Array to hold learn string t OUTPUT ONwa OPC SING Place analyzer in single sweep ENTER Nwa Reply Read the 1 when complete i i OUTPUT Nwa OUTPLEAS i Request learn string ENTER Nwa USING K Learn i Allocate an array for storing the CAL data OUTPUT Nwa POIN Find number of points in trace ENTER Nwa Num_points Read number to allocate array ALLOCATE Cal_array 1 Num_points 1 2 Real and Imag for each point 1 Read Cal array OUTPUT ONwa FORM3 Form 3 64 bit floating point data OUTPUT GNwa OUTPCALCO1 Request the cal array t Read the A and 2 byte length as integers ENTER Nwa_bin Head Length Cal_array Read cal array data i Write instrument state data to disk file CREATE BDAT DATA_FILE 1406 1 Length 3000 Create data file once ASSIGN File TO DATA FILE 1406 el Assign 1 0 path to file OUTPUT File Learn Send learn string to disk file OUTPUT File Head Length Cal_array Send CAL
243. siria o ok Ee e E RAN ADA aan DES a De E E a 2 8 Measurement Process 2 20 pa sem APAE we ER BH SR OSE GF oe 2 10 Step 1 Setting Up the Instrument 22 2 bill Ela ae Ow Ww 2 10 Step 2 Calibrating the Test Setup 2 e eee 2 10 Step 3 Connecting the Device under Test 2 2 ee 2 10 Step 4 Taking the Measurement Data 2 11 Step 5 Post Processing the Measurement Data 2 11 Step 6 Transferring the Measurement Data 2 11 BASIC Programming Examples 5 4 4 6 4 84 64 sn aa RS ew we 2 12 Program Information a Ge AREA Se A AAA Rd 2 13 Analyzer Features Helpful in Developing Programming Routines 2 13 Analyzer Debug Mode x vs alza as a Ea ee 2 13 User Controllable Sweep A ss dm a Aw HO 2 13 Example 1 Measurement Setup o 2 14 Example 1A Setting Parameters 2 14 Running the Program aie eS E ARA E A Set 2 15 Example 1B Verifying Parameters 2 0 0 a ee eee 2 16 Running the Program oo oe A Be a ee Soe Wee 2 17 Example 2 Measurement Calibration oa so 2 a a eee 2 18 Calibration Kits sd sica E AA ER AA 2 18 Example 2A Response Measurement Calibration 402 2 19 Running the Program vs ck aes RS Wee ale Oe Se ee Ba SS E 2 20 Example 2B Reflection 1 Port Measurement Calibration 2 2 2 21 Running the Program Ce getch
244. splays the End of plot message If a problem arises with the plotter such as no pen or paper the analyzer cannot detect the situation because it only has a one way path of communication Hence the analyzer will attempt to continue plotting until the operator intervenes and aborts the plot by pressing the analyzer s key Pressing will do the following Aborts the plot m Causes the warning message CAUTION PLOT ABORTED a Asserts EOI to return control of the bus to the system controller Because of possible peripheral malfunctions it is generally advisable to use pass control mode which allows two way communication between the peripherals and the analyzer HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 65 Example 7A2 Controlling Peripherals Using Pass Control Mode Note This program is stored as EXAMP7A2 on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer If the analyzer is in pass control mode and it receives a command telling it to plot print control a power meter or store load to disk it sets bit 1 in the event status register to indicate that it requires control of the bus If the computer then uses the HP IB pass control command to pass control to the analyzer the analyzer will take control of the bus and access the peripheral When the analyzer no longer requires control it will pass control back to the computer For a discussion on the pass control mode see Chapter 1 In this example the pass
245. status of the analyzer looking for SRQ to indicate that the analyzer is requesting control Once control is passed to the analyzer the controller monitors the status of its interface registers to detect when the interface is again the active controller The analyzer will pass control back to the controller when finished i i 1 EXAMP7A2 ASSIGN ONwa TO 716 Assign an 1 0 path for the analyzer CLEAR SCREEN Initialize the analyzer without ima to preserve data ABORT 7 Generate an IFC Interface Clear CLEAR Nwa SDC Selected Device Clear t OUTPUT Nwa OPC SING Single sweep and stop for print ENTER Nwa Reply Read in i when complete i OUTPUT Nwa CLES Clear status registers OUTPUT ONwa ESE2 Enable bit 1 of ESR request control OUTPUT QNwa SRE32 Enable ESR interrupt for SRQ 1 OUTPUT Nwa USEPASC Enable pass control mode OUTPUT Nwa PRINALL Begin printer dump REPEAT Loop until SRQ bit is set Stat SPOLL Nwa Read status byte with serial poll UNTIL BIT Stat 6 Test for bit 6 SRQ 1 Pass_control SRQ detected Test for pass control i IF BIT Stat 5 THEN Requested pass control PASS CONTROL QNwa Send take control message l ELSE Not bit 5 some other event DISP SRQ but not request pass control STOP Halt program END IF t DISP Printing from analyzer and waiting for control HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 67 410 420 REPEAT 1
246. stimulus and trace values for each failed point in the test Fast data transfer command for OUTPFORM Outputs the formatted display data array from the active channel in the current format See Table 1 3 for the contents of the array positions as a function of display format 1 68 HP IB Programming and Command Reference These commands output over HP IB the interpolated calibration coefficient arrays for the active calibration on the active channel OUTPICALO1 OUTPICALOZ OUTPICALOS OUTPIDEN OUTPKEY OUTPLEAS OUTPLIM1 OUTPLIM2 Array 1 Array 2 Array 8 Outputs the identification string for the analyzer HEWLETT PACKARD 8752C 0 X XX where X XX is the firmware revision Outputs the key code of the last key pressed An invalid key is reported with a 63 a knob turn with a 1 See Figure 1 6 for the front panel key codes Outputs the learn string which contains the entire front panel state the limit table and the list frequency table It is always in form 1 Outputs the status of the limit test for channel 1 Outputs the status of the limit test for channel 2 These commands output the limit test results The results consist of four fields First is the stimulus value for the point Second is an integer indicating test status Third is the upper limit at that point Fourth is the lower limit at that point If there are no limits at that point the third and fourth fields are zero The test status is 1 for
247. t Two commands allow you to query the pass fail test status on a limit segment basis a SELSEG D will select the segment m OUTPSEGF will return the status of the limit test for that segment 1 PASS O FAIL or 1 NO_LIMIT if no limit exists for the selected segment number Due to the non sequential numbering of actual limit line segments on the screen some segment numbers will have no associated limits and will thus return 1 NO_LIMIT Under the following conditions OUTPSEGF will issue the following errors o If the limit testing is OFF 30 Requested Data Not Currently Available To clear the error message turn the limit test ON o If the limit table is empty 204 Limit Table Empty this is a new message To clear the error message enter a limit table In both cases the error is issued and the command responds with 1 NO_LIMIT The argument for SELSEG D is limited by the maximum number of segments allowed in the limit table which is currently 18 The minimum value for the argument is 1 If the user inputs a number that is outside this range the active entry limits are invoked causing the analyzer to return the status for limit 18 Example Sending SELSEG3 and OUTPSEGF may return the following 1 segment number 3 passed Note The output is ASCII Currently the formatting for integer numbers appears to E append a trailing space 2 84 HP BASIC Programming Examples Output Pass Fail Sta
248. t Codes continued Function Action Mnemonic 8 2 o SYSTEM transform continued GATEO lt ON OFF gt GATESTARID GATESTOP D GATECENTID GATESPAN D Gate shape i GATSMAXI GATSWIDE GATSNORM GATSMINI Stimulus range Stimulus range Stimulus range Stimulus range t For frequency sweeps 300 kHz to 1 3 GHz 300 kHz to 3 GHz for Option 003 and 30 kHz to 6 GHz for Option 006 For power sweeps 15 to 20 dBm in range 0 25 dB maximum in other ranges For CW time 0 to 24 hours For frequency sweep transform on 1 frequency step For CW time sweep transform on 1 time step 1 48 HP IB Programming and Command Reference HP IB Only Commands Table 1 9 HP IB Only Commands Description Move marker MARKBUCK D On completion Plot print PSOFT lt ON OFF gt softkeys Copy default DEFLTCPIO Revision SOFR Learn string SELL D Test set TESS External trigger EXTTHIGH EXTTLOW 1 0 Outputs the identification string HEWLETT PACKARD 8752C 0 X XX where X XX is the firmware revision of the instrument imitates pressing a key The data transmitted is the key code as defined in Figure 1 6 Range for D 1 to 61 Outputs last key code or knob count If the reply is positive it is a key code If it is negative then set bit 15 equal to bit 14 and the resulting two byte integer is the RPG knob count It can be either positive or negative There are about 120 counts per turn Moves t
249. t D lt 255 Enables event status register B 0 lt D lt 255 Enables SRQ 0 lt D lt 255 Alphabetical Mnemonic Listing Mnemonic AB ADDRCONT D ADDRDISC D ADDRPERI D ADDRPLOT D ADDRPOWM D ADDRPRIN D ALTAB ANAB lt ONIOFF gt ANAI AR ASEG ASSS AUTO AVERFACT D AVERO lt ON OFF gt AVERREST BACI D BANDPASS Description Measure and display A B on the active channel Controller HP IB address the address where control is returned after a pass control Disk HP IB address Peripheral HP IB address Plotter HP IB address Power meter HP IB address Printer HP IB address Places the analyzer in the alternate inputs measurement mode where inputs A and B are measured on alternate sweeps As opposed to CHOPAB Enables the analog bus for service use Measure and display the data at the auxiliary input ANALOG IN Measure and display A R on the active channel Use all segments for list frequency sweep Asserts the sequence status bit Auto scale the active channel Set the averaging factor on the active channel Turns averaging ON and OFF on the active channel Restarts the averaging on the active channel Sets the background intensity of the display Select the time domain bandpass mode These commands control the warning beeper causing it to sound if the indicated condition occurs BEEPDONE lt ON OFF gt BEEPFAIL lt ON OFF gt BEEPWARN lt ON OFF gt BR The completion of functions
250. ted l OUTPUT Nwa FORM3 OUTPUT Nwa OUTPFORM i ENTER Nwadat Dheader Dlength i Read headers from trace data i ALLOCATE Dat 1 Dlength 16 1 2 ENTER Nwadat Dat Generate an IFC Interface Clear SDC Selective Device Clear Preset the analyzer and wait Read the 1 when completed e cc sam oo Set trace length to 11 points Start frequency 10 MHz Stop frequency 200 MHz Set log frequency sweep e cu ua ama e om Select form 3 trace format Output formatted trace Use length to determine array size Read in trace data Create the corresponding frequency values for the array H Read the frequency values using the limit test array ALLOCATE Freq 1 Dlength 16 1 4 Limit line results array Limit line values are frequency test results upper and lower limits 1 OUTPUT CNwa DUTPLIML Request limit line test results ENTER Nwa Freq Read 4 values per point Display table of freq and data l PRINT Freq MHz Mag dB Print table header FOR 1 1 TO 11 Cycle through the trace values Freqm Freq 1 1 1 E 6 Convert frequency to MHz PRINT USING 4D 6D 9X 3D 3D Freqm Dat I i Print trace data HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 33 Discrete marker mode Turn on marker and place at 10 MHz Wait for the analyzer to finish Read the 1 when complete Release HP IB control Blank line 540 NEXT I 550 560 Set up marker to examine frequency values 570 OUTPUT Q Nwa MARKDISC 580 OUTPU
251. ted for the current trace before transmitting data If the bandwidth search function is not activated it will activate the bandwidth search function long enough to update the current values before switching OFF the bandwidth search functions Fast Data Transfer Commands The HP 8752C has four distinct fast data transfer commands These commands circumvent the internal byte handler routine and output trace dumps as block data In other words the analyzer outputs the entire array without allowing any process swapping to occur FORMA ASCII data transfer times are not affected by these routines However there are speed improvements with binary data formats The following is a description of the four fast data transfer commands a OUTPDATF outputs the error corrected data from the active channel in the current output format This data may be input to the analyzer using the INPUDATA command OUTPFORF outputs the formatted display trace array from the active channel in the current output format Only the first number in each of the OUTPFORM data pairs is actuall transferred for the display formats group IMA 3 inary Because the data array does not contain the second value for these display formats the INPUFORM command may not be used to re input the data back into the analyzer The second value may not be significant in some display formats see Table 1 4 thus reducing the number of bytes transferred m OUTPMEMF ou
252. teners allowed 1 6 NUMG Dj 1 67 O OFSD D 1 67 OFSLID 1 67 OFSZ D 1 68 OPC 1 49 1 68 OPC compatible commands 1 14 open capacitance values 1 56 OPEP 1 68 operating parameters 1 68 operational capabilities for HP IB 1 9 operation complete 1 14 operation complete commands 2 7 operation of analyzer 1 14 operation of HP IB 1 6 OUTPACTI 1 51 OUTPAMAX 1 52 1 68 2 78 OUTPAMIN 1 52 1 68 2 78 OUTPCALC lt I gt 1 51 1 68 OUTPCALK 1 51 1 68 OUTPDAPT 1 53 2 78 OUTPDATA 1 51 1 68 OUTPDATF 1 51 1 68 OUTPDATP 1 68 OUTPDATR 1 53 1 68 2 78 OUTPERRO 1 51 1 68 OUTPFAIP 1 53 1 68 2 78 OUTPFORF 1 51 1 68 OUTPFORM 1 51 1 68 OUTPICAL lt I gt 1 51 1 69 OUTPIDEN 1 51 1 69 OUTPKEY 1 51 1 69 OUTPLEAS 1 51 1 69 OUTPLIMI 1 53 1 69 2 78 OUTPLIM2 1 53 1 69 2 78 OUTPLIMF 1 51 1 69 OUTPLIML 1 51 1 69 OUTPLIMM 1 52 1 69 OUTPMARK 1 52 1 69 OUTPMEMF 1 52 1 69 OUTPMEMO 1 52 1 69 OUTPMSTA 1 52 1 69 OUTPMWID 1 52 1 69 OUTPMWIL 1 52 1 69 OUTPOPTS 1 69 OUTPPLOT 1 69 OUTPPRIN 1 69 OUTPPRNALL 1 52 1 70 OUTPRAF lt I gt 1 52 1 70 OUTPRAWI 1 70 OUTPRAW lt I gt 1 52 OUTPSEGAF 1 53 1 70 2 78 OUTPSEGAM 1 52 1 70 2 78 OUTPSEGF 1 53 1 70 2 78 OUTPSEGM 1 70 OUTPSEGMID 1 52 2 78 OUTPSEQ lt I gt 1 51 1 70 OUTPSERN 1 51 1 70 2 78 OUTPSTAT 1 52 1 54 1 70 OUTPTITL 1 52 1 70 output plot string 1 69 output chi status 1 69 output ch2 status 1 6
253. ter titles to the disk register titles Turns interpolative error correction ON and OFF Turns error correction ON and OFF Couples and uncouples the stimulus between the channels Couple the power when coupled channels is turned OFF COUCOFF Sets the CW frequency for power sweep and CW frequency modes While the list frequency table segment is being edited it sets the center frequency of the current segment Selects the CW time sweep type This command divides the data in channel 1 by the data in channel 2 and displays the result on channel 2 Stores trace in channel memory OPC compatible Turns the HP IB debug mode ON and OFF When ON the HP 8752C scrolis incoming HP IB commands across the display Decrements the sequencing loop counter by 1 NEWSEQ lt I gt must precede to ensure that a sequence is currently being created or modified 1 58 HP4B Programming and Command Reference DEFC Sets the default colors for all display features DEFLTCPIO Sets up the following default state for copy HP IB only command There is no equivalent front panel key as Plotter Type PLOTTER Plotter Port HPIB Plotter HP IB Address 5 Printer Type THINKJET Printer HP IB Address 1 DEFLPRINT Sets the printer to the following default setup conditions Print Monochrome Auto feed On Print Colors Ch 1 Data Magenta Ch 1 Memory Green Ch 2 Data Blue Ch 2 Memory Red Graticule Cyan Warning Black Text Black DEFS D Begins standard
254. the analyzer does not recognize a character as appropriate it generates a syntax error message and recovers at the next terminator Units The analyzer can input and output data in basic units such as Hz dB seconds ete S Seconds HZ Hertz V Volts DB dB or dBm Input data is assumed to be in basic units see above unless one of the following units is used upper and lower case are equivalent MS Milliseconds KHZ Kilohertz US Microseconds MHZ Megahertz NS Nanoseconds GHZ Gigahertz PS Picoseconds FS Femtoseconds Command Formats The HP IB commands accepted by the analyzer can be grouped into five input syntax types The analyzer does not distinguish between upper and lower case letters General Structure The general syntax structure is codel appendage data unit terminator The individual sections of the syntax code are explained below code The root mnemonic these codes are described in the Alphabetical Mnemonic Listing later in this chapter appendage A qualifier attached to the root mnemonic Possible appendages are ON or OFF toggle a function ON or OFF or integers which specify one capability out of several There can be no spaces or symbols between the code and the appendage data A single operand used by the root mnemonic usually to set the value of a function The data can be a number or a character string Numbers are accepted as integers or decimals with power of ten specified by E for exam
255. the bus is in remote mode and a device is addressed it receives instructions from the system controller via HP IB rather than from its front panel pressing returns the device to front panel operation When this line is set false high the bus and all of the connected devices return to local operation This line is used by a talker to indicate the last data byte in a multiple byte transmission or by an active controller to initiate a parallel poll sequence The analyzer recognizes the EOI line as a terminator and it pulls the EOI line with the last byte of a message output data markers plots prints error messages The analyzer does not respond to parallel poll Number of Interconnected Devices 15 maximum Interconnection Path Maximum Cable Length 20 meters maximum or 2 meters per device Message Transfer Scheme Data Rate Address Capability Multiple Controller Capability whichever is less Byte serial bit parallel asynchronous data transfer using a 3 line handshake system Maximum of 1 megabyte per second over the specified distances with tri state drivers Actual data rate depends on the transfer rate of the slowest device connected to the bus Primary addresses 31 talk 31 listen A maximum of 1 talker and 14 listeners can be connected to the interface at given time In systems with more than one controller such as this instrument only one controller can be active at any given time The active cont
256. the controller display A prompt appears Press return to continue which allows viewing of the file contents Once is pressed the data records are read and decoded and a table of the stimulus frequency and the data values are printed 2 76 HP BASIC Programming Examples Limit Line and Data Point Special Functions The analyzer has special functions in the area of limit testing and in the detection of min max data points within limit segments The information in this section will teach you how to use these limit line and data point special functions The following topics are included m Overview x Constants Used Throughout This Document Output Limit Test Pass Fail Status Per Limit Segment a Output Pass Fail Status For All Segments m Output Minimum and Maximum Point Per Limit Segment m Output Minimum and Maximum Point For All Segments w Output Data Per Point Output Data Per Range of Points Output Limit Pass Fail by Channel E HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 77 Overview The limit line and data point special functions are available as remote commands only Each command is overviewed in Table 2 4 Table 2 4 Limit Line and Data Point Special Functions Commands action Meemonie sms to to MIN MAX DATA TT MIN MAX DATA DETECTION PER LIMITSEGMENT O OOOO O PER LIMIT SEGMENT Min max MINMAX lt ON OFF gt 1 0 Enables disables min max recording per segment Min recording and max values are recorded per limit segment
257. the printer type Selects the LaserJet printer as the printer type Selects the PaintJet printer as the printer type Selects the ThinkJet printer as the printer type 1 72 HP IB Programming and Command Reference PSOFT lt ON OFF gt PTEXT lt ON OFF gt PTOS Controls whether softkeys are included in the hardcopy print or plot when using one of the following commands PLOT PRINALL OUTPPLOT or OUTPPRIN Selects whether text is plotted Pauses the sequence to be followed by selection one of the 6 sequences SEQ lt I gt These commands purge the indicated file from disk Requires pass control mode when using the HP IB port PURGI PURG2 PURG3 PURG4 PURG5 PWRLOSS lt ON OFF gt PWRR lt PAUTO PMAN gt Q lt I gt RAID RAUSOL RATRESP REAL File 1 File 2 File 3 File 4 File 5 Selects whether or not to use the power loss table for use in service tests Select whether the source power range is in auto or manual mode Option 004 only Same as SEQ lt I gt Completes the response and isolation cal sequence OPC compatible Calls the isolation class for the response and isolation calibration Calls the response class for the response and isolation calibration Selects the real display format These commands recall the indicated internal register They are all OPC compatible RECAI RECA2 RECA3 RECA4 RECA5 RECAREG lt I gt RECO REFP D REFT REFV D RESC Register 1 Register 2 Registe
258. to the analyzer See Example 5A Using the Learn String Step 2 Calibrating the Test Setup After you have defined an instrument state you should perform a measurement calibration Although it is not required a measurement calibration improves the accuracy of your measurement data The following list describes several methods to calibrate the analyzer z Stop the program and perform a calibration from the analyzer s front panel Use the computer to guide you through the calibration as discussed in Example 2A Response Measurement Calibration and Example 2B Reflection 1 Port Measurement Calibration a Transfer the calibration data from a previous calibration back into the analyzer as discussed in Example 5C Saving and Restoring the Analyzer Instrument State Step 3 Connecting the Device under Test After you connect your test device you can use the computer to speed up any necessary device adjustments such as limit testing bandwidth searches and trace statistics 2 10 HP BASIC Programming Examples Step 4 Taking the Measurement Data Measure the device response and set the analyzer to hold the data This captures the data on the analyzer display By using the single sweep command SING you can insure a valid sweep When you use this command the analyzer completes all stimulus changes before starting the sweep and does not release the HP IB hold state until it has displayed the formatted trace T
259. tputs the memory trace from the active channel The data is in real imaginary pairs and as such may be input back into the memory trace using INPUDATA or INPUFORM followed by the DATI command OUTPRAF lt I gt outputs the raw measurement data trace The data may be input back into the memory trace using the INPURAW lt I gt command Data Levels Different levels of data can be read out of the instrument Refer to the data processing chain in Figure 1 4 The following list describes the different types of data that are available from the network analyzer Raw data The basic measurement data reflecting the stimulus parameters IF averaging and IF bandwidth Error coefficients The results of a measurement calibration are arrays containing error coefficients These error coefficients are then used in the error correction routines Each array corresponds to a specific error term in the error model The HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide details which error coefficients are used for specific calibration types as well as the arrays those coefficients can be found in Not all calibration types use all 3 arrays The data is stored as real imaginary pairs Error corrected data This is the raw data with error correction applied The array represents the currently measured parameter and is stored in real imaginary pairs The error corrected data can be output to a controller with the OUTPDATA command The OUTPMEMO 1 22 HPAB Programmi
260. transfer control back to the system controller at the completion of the operation It will pass control back to its controller address specified by ADDRCONT The analyzer can also operate in the system controller mode This mode is only used when there is no remote controller on the bus In this mode the analyzer takes control of the bus and uses it whenever it needs to access a peripheral While the analyzer is in this mode no other devices on the bus can attempt to take control Specifically the REN ATN and IFC lines must remain unasserted and the data lines must be freed by all but the addressed talker Setting HP IB Addresses In systems interfaced using HP IB each instrument on the bus is identified by an HP IB address This address code must be different for each instrument on the bus These addresses are stored in short term non volatile memory and are not affected when you press or cycle the power The analyzer occupies two HP IB addresses the instrument itself and the display The display address is derived from the instrument address by compiementing the instrument s least significant bit Hence if the instrument is at an even address the display occupies the next higher address If the instrument is at an odd address the display occupies the next lower address The analyzer addresses are set by pressing SET ADDRESSES In system controller mode the addresses must be set for the plotter printer disk drive and power meter
261. troller When this happens the front panel remote R and listen L HP IB status indicators illuminate In remote mode the analyzer ignores any data that is input with the front panel keys with the exception of LOCAL Pressing LOCAL returns the analyzer to manual operation unless the universal HP IB command LOCAL LOCKOUT 7 has been issued There are two ways to exit from a local lockout Either issue the LOCAL 7 command from the controller or cycle the line power on the analyzer Setting a parameter such as start frequency is just one form of command the analyzer will accept It will also accept simple commands that require no operand at all For example execute OUTPUT 716 AUTO In response the analyzer autoscales the active channel Autoscale only applies to the active channel unlike start frequency which applies to both channels as long as the channels are stimulus coupled The analyzer will also accept commands that switch various functions ON and OFF For example to switch on dual channel display execute OUTPUT 716 DUACON DUACON is the analyzer root mnemonic for dual channel display on This causes the analyzer to display both channels To go back to single channel display mode for example switching off dual channel display execute OUTPUT 716 DUACOFF The construction of the command starts with the root mnemonic DUAC dual channel display and ON or OFF is appended to the root to form the entire com
262. ts 340 PRINT Number of bytes Dlength 350 360 Print out the data array 370 PRINT Element Value 1 Value 2 380 IMAGE 3D 6X 3D 4D 6X 3D 4D 390 FOR I 1 TO Numpoints 2 30 HP BASIC Programming Examples Loop through the data points 400 PRINT USING 380 I Dat 1 1 Dat 1 2 410 NEXT I 420 430 OUTPUT Nwa MARKDISC Discrete marker mode 440 OUTPUT Nwa MARKi 3E 4 t Position marker at 30 KHz 450 460 OUTPUT Nwa OPC WAIT t Wait for the analyzer to finish 470 ENTER Nwa Reply Read the 1 when complete 480 LOCAL GNva t Release HP IB control 490 500 PRINT 510 PRINT Position the marker with the knob and compare the values 520 530 END Running the Program Run the program The computer displays the number of elements and bytes associated with the transfer of the trace as well as the first 10 data points Position the marker and examine the data values Compare the displayed values with the analyzer s marker values HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 31 Example 3D Data Transfer Using Frequency Array Information Note This program is stored as EXAMP3D on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer Example 3C was used to read in the trace data array Example 3D explains how to use the limit test array to read the corresponding frequency values for the completed trace array The analyzer is set to sweep from 10 MHz to 200 MHz in log frequency mode w
263. ttract the attention of the operator and then prompts for a new device To test the program s pass fail accuracy try causing the DUT to fail by loosening the cables connecting the DUT to the analyzer and running the program again HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 63 Example 7 Report Generation The analyzer has three operating modes with respect to HP IB These modes can be changed by accessing softkeys in the menu System controller mode is used when no computer is present This mode allows the analyzer to control the system The other two modes allow a remote system controller to coordinate certain actions in talker listener mode the remote system controller can control the analyzer as well as coordinate plotting and printing and in pass control mode the remote system controller can pass active control to the analyzer so that the analyzer can plot print control a power meter or load store to disk Peripheral control is the main difference between talker listener and pass control mode See Chapter 1 for more details Example 7A1 Operation Using Talker Listener Mode E e DNS Ne a pgs id Note This program is stored as EXAMP7A1 on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer a nma a Er mr The commands OUTPPLOT and OUTPPRIN allow talker listener mode plotting and printing via a one way data path from the analyzer to the plotter or printer The computer sets up the path by addressing the analyz
264. tus for All Segments The HP IB command OUTPSEGAF will return the number of segments being reported followed by pairs of data consisting of the segment number and its status A segment is reported only if it has an associated limit The output is only valid if limit test is on See the previous discussion Output Limit Test Pass Fail Status Per Limit Segment Example Sending OUTPSEGAF may return the following 3 1 0 3 1 5 0 For an explanation of these results see table Table 2 9 Note A new Line Feed character LF is inserted after the number of segments and after each data pair Table 2 9 Example Output OUTPSEGAF pass fail for all segments SEGMENTS SEGMENT REPORTED NUMBER STATUS ENE FAIL PASS FAIL Table 2 9 is an interpretation of the data returned by the command OUTPSEGAF For clarification status definition is also included Example Program of OUTPSEGAF Using BASIC The following program is not included on the Programming Examples disk 10 OUTPUT 716 outpsegaf 20 ENTER 716 Numsegs 30 PRINT Receiving status for Numsegs segments 40 IF Numsegs gt 0 THEN 50 FOR I 1 TO Numsegs 60 ENTER 716 Segnum Pf 70 PRINT USING DD 2X 8A Segnum Pf 80 NEXT I HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 85 The example program shows how the OUTPSEGAF command can be used to request the number of active segments and their status Notice that each segment result must use a new enter command as a line feed
265. uadrant Enters the limit line amplitude offset Turns the display of the limit lines ON and OFF Marker to limit offset Centers the limit lines about the current marker position using the limit amplitude offset function Enters the stimulus offset of the limit lines Turns limit testing ON and OFF These commands edit a limit test segment The limit table editing is begun with EDITLIML and a segment is brought up for editing with either SADD or SEDI N The segment is closed with SDON the table is closed with EDITDONE LIMD D LIML D LIMM D LIMS D LIMTFL LIMTSL LIMTSP LIMU D LINFREQ LINM LINTDATA D LINTMEMO D LISFREQ Sets the limit delta value while editing a limit line segment Sets the lower limit value Sets the middle limit value Sets the limit stimulus break point Make the segment a flat line Make the segment a sloping line Make the segment a single point Set the upper limit value Selects a linear frequency sweep Selects the linear magnitude display format Enters the line type for plotting data Enters the line type for plotting memory Selects the list frequency sweep mode 1 64 HP IB Programming and Command Reference LISV Activates the list values function The next page of values can be called with NEXP The current page can be plotted or printed in raster graphics mode with PLOT or PRINALL The entire list can be printed in ASCII text mode with PRINTALL These
266. ucture of status reporting 1 24 SVCO 1 78 SWEA 1 78 SWET D 1 78 SWR 1 78 syntax for commands 1 3 syntax for output 1 15 syntax structure 1 4 syntax types 1 5 system controller capabilities C1 C2 C3 1 9 system controller mode 1 10 1 11 SYSTEM HP IB commands 1 46 T T6 basic talker 1 9 take control command 1 13 talker interface function 1 6 talker listener 1 78 talker listener mode 1 11 TALKLIST 1 78 talk mode T 1 10 TEO no extended talker capabilities 1 9 TERI D 1 78 terminal impedance 1 78 terminators 1 5 TESS 1 49 1 78 text color 1 70 ThinkJet 1 72 TIMDTRAN 1 78 time domain bandpass 1 55 time domain gate 1 62 time domain HP IB commands 1 47 time specify 1 78 TINT 1 78 TITF lt I gt 1 79 TITL 1 79 title CRT 1 79 plot to disk 1 79 title disk file 1 79 title register 1 79 index 11 title sequence 1 79 title string to trace memory 1 79 title to peripheral 1 79 title to printer 1 79 TITP 1 79 TITREG lt I gt 1 79 TITR lt I gt 1 79 TITSEQ lt I gt 1 79 TITSQ 1 79 TITTMEM 1 79 TITTPERI 1 79 TITTPRIN 1 79 trace data transfers 1 19 trace memory 1 21 trace related data 1 16 TRACK 1 79 transfer of data 1 7 transfers of trace data 1 19 transform 1 78 TRAP 1 79 TRIG 1 80 trigger continuous 1 58 external 1 61 hold 1 62 number of groups 1 67 single 1 76 trigger device 1 13 tri state drivers E2 1 9 TST 1 80 T talk mode 1
267. unning the Program The program begins by initializing the analyzer and placing it into single sweep mode The plotter commands are captured into strings in the controller The controller display prompts Plotter output complete Press RETURN to store on disk Pressing causes the data to be stored to disk Once this task is complete the program prompts once more Plot to file is complete Press Return to plot After pressing again the string output is sent to the plotter and the plot begins Once the plot is complete the program prompts Plot is complete End of program and the analyzer begins sweeping and returns to local control Utilizing PC Graphics Applications Using the Plot File You can use this Example 7B to generate a plot that can be read into a PC and used in several different graphics generation programs HP GL is a commonly recognized graphic format and may be used to transfer information to PC application programs such as CorelIDRAW Lotus Freelance and other graphics packages By importing the graphics data into these application packages you can generate reports in many work processors You can then use graphic data files to generate the following u test results documentation m data sheets from testing results m archival information for a digital storage medium If you would like to create a disk file for graphics processing modify the previous program to only store the plotter commands to the disk file The PC will no
268. urned to local control and the program ends HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 23 The program is written as follows 10 This program shows how to read in a data trace in IEEE 64 bit 20 format The array header is used to determine the length of the 30 array and to allocate the array size 40 50 Program Example 3C 60 2 70 CLEAR SCREEN 80 Initialize the analyzer 90 ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 the analyzer 100 ASSIGN Nwadat TO 716 FORMAT OFF definition 110 120 ABORT 7 Interface Clear 130 CLEAR Nwa Clear 140 OUTPUT ONwa 0PC7 PRES walt 150 ENTER Nwa Reply completed 160 170 INTEGER Dheader Dlength header info 180 Numpoints 11 trace 190 OUTPUT Nwa POIN Numpoints trace 200 210 Set up data transfer 220 OUTPUT ONwa 0PC SING 230 ENTER ONwa Reply completed 240 250 OUTPUT ONwa FORM3 260 OUTPUT ONwa DUTPFORM trace 270 280 ENTER QNwadat Dheader Dlength data 290 300 ALLOCATE Dat 1 Dlength 16 1 2 array size 310 ENTER Nwadat Dat 320 Assign an I 0 path for Binary data path Generate an IFC SDC Selected Device Preset the analyzer and Read the 1 when Integer variables for Number of points in the Set number of points in Single sweep and wait Read the i when Select form 3 format Send formatted output Read headers from trace Use length to determine 1 Read in trace data 330 PRINT Size of array Dlength 16 elemen
269. utput commands data levels the learn string and the calibration kit string Data Arrays Figure 1 4 shows the different kinds of data available within the instrument m raw measured data E error corrected data m formatted data m trace memory calibration coefficients Trace memory can be directly output to a controller with OUTPMEMO but it cannot be directly transmitted back OUTPCALC OUTPMEMO One channel shown Parameter ion E Convers l Formatted Data Accessible Process Array Function OUTPFORM Figure 1 4 The Data Processing Chain ob64d All the data output commands are designed to insure that the data transmitted reflects the current state of the instrument m OUTPDATA OUTPRAW and OUTPFORM will not transmit data until all formatting functions have completed a OUTPLIML OUTPLIMM and OUTPLIMF will not transmit data until the limit test has occurred if activated No j OUTPMARK will activate a marker if a marker is not already selected It will also insure that any current marker searches have been completed before transmitting data HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 21 OUTPMSTA insures that the statistics have been calculated for the current trace before transmitting data If the statistics are not activated it will activate the statistics long enough to update the current values before deactivating the statistics m OUTPMWID insures that a bandwidth search has been execu
270. w have a DOS format file hpg file that can be imported and examined by the graphics package HP BASIC Programming Examples 2 71 Example 7C Reading ASCII Disk Files to the System Controller Disk File Note This program is stored as EXAMP7C on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer Another way to access the analyzer s test results is to store the data onto a disk file from the analyzer An HP CS 80 disk drive is required to create a floppy disk based file for this example This floppy disk will be moved from the controller and then accessed to read the data file This operation generates an ASCII file of the analyzer data in a CITIFILE format A typical file generated by Example 7C is shown below CITIFILE 4 01 00 NA VERSION HP8752C 04 13 NAME DATA VAR FREQ MAG 11 DATA 511 11 RE SEG_LIST_BEGIN SEG 100000000 200000000 11 SEG_LIST_END BEGIN 8 30566E 1 1 36749E 1 8 27392E 1 1 43676E 1 26080E 1 1 52069E 1 25653E 1 1 60003E 1 26385E 1 1 68029E 1 26507E 1 1 77154E 1 26263E 1 1 87316E 1 26721E 1 1 97265 E 1 27 24E 1 2 07611E 1 28552E 1 2 19940E 1 29620E 1 2 31109E 1 END This data file can be stored from the analyzer by remote control or by front panel operations See Saving Instrument States in the Printing Plotting and Saving Measurement Results chapter in the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide for more details on manual operation co 00 amp
271. wing commands select the standard type after the standard number has been entered during a modify cal kit sequence STDTARBI Arbitrary impedance STDTDELA Delay thru STDTLOAD Load HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 77 STDTOPEN STDTSHOR STOP D Open Short Sets the stimulus stop value If a list frequency segment is being edited sets the stop of the segment These commands store the indicated file on disk Used with the INTD and EXTD commands to designate the internal or external disk Requires pass control mode when using the HP IB port STORI STOR2 STOR3 STOR4 STOR5 Stores the current instrument state to disk using the file name provided by the preceding TITFi command Stores the current instrument state to disk using the file name provided by the preceding TITF2 command Stores the current instrument state to disk using the file name provided by the preceding TITF3 command Stores the current instrument state to disk using the file name provided by the preceding TITF4 command Stores the current instrument state to disk using the file name provided by the preceding TITF5 command These commands store the instrument state to the indicated sequence to disk Used with the INTD and EXTD commands to designate the internal or external disk Requires pass control mode STORSEQI STORSEQ2 STORSEQ3 STORSEQ4 STORSEQ5 STORSEQ6 STPSIZE SVCO SWEA SWET D SWR TALKLIST TERI D TESS
272. work analyzer under HP IB control You should already be familiar with making measurements with the analyzer Information about the HP IB commands is organized as follows Analyzer Command Syntax m Code Naming Convention a Valid Characters o Units o Command Formats u HP IB Operation o Device Types o HP IB Bus Structure a HP IB Requirements o HP IB Operational Capabilities o Bus Device Modes o Setting HP IB Addresses o Response to HP IB Meta Messages IEEE 488 Universal Commands w Analyzer Operation Complete Commands m Reading Analyzer Data o Output Queue o Command Query o Identification Output Syntax O Marker Data o Array Data Formats o Trace Data Transfers o Stimulus Related Values u Data Processing Chain o Data Arrays E o Fast Data Transfer Commands o Data Levels 3 J o Learn String and Calibration Kit String a HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 1 a Error Reporting o Status Reporting a The Status Byte o The Event Status Register and Event Status Register B o Error Output s Calibration m Disk File Names m Using Key Codes m Key Select Codes Arranged by Front Panel Hardkey HP IB Only Commands z Alphabetical Mnemonic Listing For information about manual operation of the analyzer refer to the HP 8752C Network Analyzer User s Guide Where to Look for More Information Additional information covering many of the topics discussed in this chapter is located in the following w Tutorial Description of
273. xamples Example 7B Plotting to a File and Transferring File Data to a Plotter Note This program is stored as EXAMP7B on the HP 8752C Programming Examples disk received with the network analyzer Another report generation technique is to transfer the plotter string to a disk file and retrieve and plot the disk file at another time Test time is increased when a plot occurs during the process It may be more convenient to plot the data at another site or time One solution to this problem is to capture the plot data using the controller and store it to a disk file This disk file may then be read from the controller and the contents transferred to a plotter This next example shows a method of accomplishing this task The analyzer is initialized without presetting the analyzer The data that is in place in the analyzer is not disturbed by the program operation A large string is dimensioned to hold the plotter commands as they are received from the analyzer The length of this string depends upon the complexity of the analyzer s display The analyzer is placed in the single sweep mode and OPC SING is used to make sure that operation is complete before plotting The plotting begins with the OUTPPLOT command The string transfer is ended by the controller detecting the EOI lme which the analyzer pulls at the end of the transfer The string transfer terminates and the plot data is now stored in a string in the analyzer These strings c
274. xed length for a given firmware revision The array has the same header as in FORM 1 The calibration kit is a set of key characteristics of the calibration standards used to increase the calibration accuracy There are default kits for several different connector types There is also space for a user defined calibration kit The command OUTPCALK outputs the currently active calibration kit as a binary string in FORM 1 As with the learn string the calibration kit string has a fixed length for a given firmware revision It can not be longer than 1000 bytes HP IB Programming and Command Reference 1 23 Error Reporting This section describes the analyzer s error reporting process It includes information on status reporting the status byte the event status registers and the error output Status Reporting The analyzer status reporting structure is depicted in Figure 1 5 SRO Event Message Check Event Request Status In Output Error j Status Forward Reverse i Service Register Queue Queue Register amp SET GET Search Limi imi Date Copy Feli i Foi i i Entry Complete E a Complete Syntax User f Error Request i HP LB Request opc Control 1 i 128 54 32 16 8 4 2 1 EVENT STATUS REGISTER pg6151d Figure 1 5 Status Reporting Structure 1 24 HP IB Programming and Command Reference Table 1 5 Status Bit Definitions Status Byte Da vas a 0 This bit is not used with th
275. y is read in m The table header is printed u The program cycles through the trace values a The trace data and frequency are printed a The discrete marker mode is activated a The marker is activated and placed at 10 MHz m The instrument is returned to local control and the program ends 2 32 HP BASIC Programming Examples The program is written as follows 10 20 30 40 50 240 250 260 270 280 290 300 310 320 330 340 350 360 370 380 390 400 410 420 430 440 450 460 470 480 490 500 510 520 530 i This program shows how to read in a trace and create the frequency value associated with the trace data value EXAMP3C is used to read in the data from the analyzer The start and stop frequencies are set to provide two decades of log range Log sweep is set and the frequency data points are read from the limit test t array and displayed with the data points t i i EXAMP3D ASSIGN Nwa TO 716 Assign an 1 0 path for the analyzer ASSIGN QNwadat TO 716 FORMAT OFF Binary path for data transfer i CLEAR SCREEN Initialize the analyzer ABORT 7 CLEAR Nwa OUTPUT Nwa OPC PRES ENTER ONwa Reply l INTEGER Dheader Dlength Integer variables for header info OUTPUT Nwa POIN 11 OUTPUT Nwa STAR 10 E 6 OUTPUT ONwa STOP 200 E 6 OUTPUT Nwa LOGFREQ Set up data transfer OUTPUT Nwa 0PC SING Single sweep and wait ENTER Nwa Reply Read the 1 when comple

HP 8753C User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents